202
7391193 / 01 09 / 2018 Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface AC1421 AC1422 Master profile: M4 Firmware: 4.3.1 or higher English

Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

  • Upload
    others

  • View
    17

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

> >

7391

193

/ 0

1

09 / 2

01

8

Device Manual

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

AC1421

AC1422

Master profile: M4

Firmware: 4.3.1 or higher

English

Page 2: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

2

Contents

1 Preliminary note 5

1.1 Legal and copyright information ........................................................................................... 5 1.2 Purpose of the document ..................................................................................................... 5 1.3 Explanation of Symbols ....................................................................................................... 6 1.4 Overview: User documentation for AC1421/22 ................................................................... 7 1.5 Modification history .............................................................................................................. 7

2 Safety instructions 8

2.1 General safety instructions .................................................................................................. 8 2.2 Required background knowledge ........................................................................................ 8 2.3 Tampering with the unit ........................................................................................................ 8

3 System description 9

3.1 Intended use ......................................................................................................................10 3.1.1 Permitted use ............................................................................................................................. 103.1.2 Prohibited use ............................................................................................................................ 10

3.2 Information concerning the device .....................................................................................11 3.2.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................... 113.2.2 Operating elements .................................................................................................................... 123.2.3 Display elements ........................................................................................................................ 123.2.4 CODESYS PLC .......................................................................................................................... 123.2.5 Interfaces .................................................................................................................................... 133.2.6 Required accessories ................................................................................................................. 13

4 Operation 14

4.1 Control of the graphical user interface ...............................................................................14 4.1.1 Function keys ............................................................................................................................. 154.1.2 Arrow keys .................................................................................................................................. 15

4.2 Menu view ..........................................................................................................................16 4.2.1 Menu navigation ......................................................................................................................... 164.2.2 Navigation aids ........................................................................................................................... 17

4.3 Page view ...........................................................................................................................19 4.3.1 Navigate on a page .................................................................................................................... 194.3.2 Use navigation aids .................................................................................................................... 194.3.3 Description of the control elements ............................................................................................ 20

4.4 Remote access ..................................................................................................................32 4.4.1 General....................................................................................................................................... 324.4.2 Recommended browsers............................................................................................................ 324.4.3 Operating instructions ................................................................................................................ 33

5 Menu 36

5.1 Start screen ........................................................................................................................36 5.2 Menu functions ...................................................................................................................37

5.2.1 Additional functions .................................................................................................................... 37

5.3 Quick setup ........................................................................................................................38 5.3.1 Quick setup: Project AS-i networks ............................................................................................ 395.3.2 Quick setup: Configure the operating mode of the AS-i masters ................................................ 405.3.3 Quick setup: Configure the output access .................................................................................. 415.3.4 Quick setup: Access the device via QR code ............................................................................. 415.3.5 Quick setup: Configure the EtherNet/IP interface ....................................................................... 415.3.6 Quick setup: Set the configuration mode .................................................................................... 435.3.7 Quick setup: Set the Configuration interface .............................................................................. 44

Page 3: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

3

5.3.8 Quick setup: Address the AS-i slaves connected to AS-i Master 1 ............................................ 465.3.9 Quick setup: Address the AS-i slaves connected to AS-i Master 2 ............................................ 47

5.4 AS-i 1 / AS-i 2 .....................................................................................................................48 5.4.1 AS-i 1 / AS-i 2: Master setup ...................................................................................................... 495.4.2 AS-i 1 / AS-i 2: Diagnosis ........................................................................................................... 515.4.3 AS-i 1 / AS-i 2: AS-i slaves ......................................................................................................... 53

5.5 System ...............................................................................................................................59 5.5.1 System: Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) .......................................................................... 605.5.2 System: Information ................................................................................................................... 665.5.3 System: Setup ............................................................................................................................ 675.5.4 System: Diagnosis ...................................................................................................................... 80

5.6 Interfaces ...........................................................................................................................81 5.6.1 Interfaces: Configuration interface .............................................................................................. 825.6.2 Interfaces: EtherNet/IP interface ................................................................................................ 85

5.7 ifm system solutions ...........................................................................................................97 5.7.1 Notes on ifm system solutions .................................................................................................... 985.7.2 Show information about installed ifm apps ................................................................................. 995.7.3 Install single/basic app ............................................................................................................. 1005.7.4 Install multi app ........................................................................................................................ 1015.7.5 Update ifm apps ....................................................................................................................... 1025.7.6 Uninstall ifm apps ..................................................................................................................... 102

6 Setup 104

6.1 Connect the device to the periphery ................................................................................104 6.1.1 EtherNet/IP interface ................................................................................................................ 1046.1.2 Configuration interface ............................................................................................................. 104

6.2 Start screen 'Basic settings' .............................................................................................105 6.2.1 Change the basic settings of the device ................................................................................... 105

6.3 Update the firmware of the device ...................................................................................107 6.3.1 Behaviour of the settings upon firmware update ...................................................................... 1076.3.2 Firmware update from SD card ................................................................................................ 1086.3.3 Firmware update via the web interface ..................................................................................... 109

6.4 Connect and address AS-i slaves ....................................................................................111 6.5 Setup of EtherNet/IP ........................................................................................................111 6.6 Setup of the configuration interface .................................................................................112 6.7 Exchange AS-i slave ........................................................................................................112

7 Troubleshooting 113

7.1 Status LED .......................................................................................................................113 7.1.1 Status LED: Basic device ......................................................................................................... 1137.1.2 Status LED: Fieldbus EtherNet/IP ............................................................................................ 113

7.2 Start screen: Status LEDs ................................................................................................114 7.2.1 Status of the web interface ....................................................................................................... 1147.2.2 Operating mode of the AS-i master .......................................................................................... 1147.2.3 Control instance of the AS-i outputs ......................................................................................... 1147.2.4 Fieldbus status ......................................................................................................................... 114

7.3 Online diagnosis function .................................................................................................115 7.3.1 Message types ......................................................................................................................... 1157.3.2 Locate error sources ................................................................................................................ 115

7.4 Online Support Center (OSC) ..........................................................................................116 7.4.1 OSC: View current error messages .......................................................................................... 1167.4.2 OSC: Show message history .................................................................................................... 117

7.5 Display diagnostic protocol ..............................................................................................118

8 Appendix 119

8.1 Approval tests / certifications ...........................................................................................119 8.2 Technical data ..................................................................................................................120

8.2.1 Housing .................................................................................................................................... 1208.2.2 Display elements ...................................................................................................................... 120

Page 4: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

4

8.2.3 Operation .................................................................................................................................. 1208.2.4 Power supply connections ........................................................................................................ 1208.2.5 Interfaces .................................................................................................................................. 1218.2.6 Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) ..................................................................................... 121

8.3 Address assignment in Ethernet networks ......................................................................122 8.4 Configuration interface: connection concepts ..................................................................123

8.4.1 Direct link .................................................................................................................................. 1238.4.2 Connection via Ethernet network .............................................................................................. 124

8.5 AS-i master ......................................................................................................................125 8.5.1 Operating modes of the AS-i master ........................................................................................ 1268.5.2 Master flags .............................................................................................................................. 128

8.6 AS-i slaves .......................................................................................................................129 8.6.1 Profiles of AS-i slaves............................................................................................................... 130

8.7 Fieldbus EtherNet/IP ........................................................................................................140 8.7.1 Fieldbus objects ....................................................................................................................... 1408.7.2 Fieldbus parameters ................................................................................................................. 1418.7.3 Device-specific parameters ...................................................................................................... 1428.7.4 Cyclic data ................................................................................................................................ 1628.7.5 Acyclic data .............................................................................................................................. 1868.7.6 EtherNet/IP projection software: Programmers' notes .............................................................. 193

8.8 OSC messages ................................................................................................................198 8.8.1 OSC messages: System .......................................................................................................... 1988.8.2 OSC messages: AS-i 1 / AS-i 2 ................................................................................................ 199

9 Index 200

Page 5: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

5

1 Preliminary note Content

Legal and copyright information ............................................................................................................... 5 Purpose of the document ......................................................................................................................... 5 Explanation of Symbols ............................................................................................................................ 6 Overview: User documentation for AC1421/22 ........................................................................................ 7 Modification history ................................................................................................................................... 7

33203 >

1.1 Legal and copyright information 33117

© All rights reserved by ifm electronic gmbh. No part of this manual may be reproduced and used without the consent of ifm electronic gmbh.

All product names, pictures, companies or other brands used on our pages are the property of the respective rights owners:

AS-i is the property of the AS-International Association, (→ www.as-interface.net)

CAN is the property of the CiA (CAN in Automation e.V.), Germany (→ www.can-cia.org)

CODESYS™ is the property of the 3S – Smart Software Solutions GmbH, Germany(→ www.codesys.com)

DeviceNet™ is the property of the ODVA™ (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association), USA(→ www.odva.org)

EtherNet/IP® is the property of the → ODVA™

EtherCAT® is a registered trade mark and patented technology, licensed by Beckhoff AutomationGmbH, Germany

IO-Link® (→ www.io-link.com) is the property of the → PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation e.V.,Germany

ISOBUS is the property of the AEF – Agricultural Industry Electronics Foundation e.V.,Deutschland (→ www.aef-online.org)

Microsoft® is the property of the Microsoft Corporation, USA (→ www.microsoft.com)

PROFIBUS® is the property of the PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation e.V., Germany(→ www.profibus.com)

PROFINET® is the property of the → PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation e.V., Germany

Windows® is the property of the → Microsoft Corporation, USA>

1.2 Purpose of the document 41760

This document applies to devices of the type "AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface (art. no.: AC1421/22)

It is part of the device and contains information about the correct handling of the product.

► Read this document before using the device.

► Keep this document during the service life of the device.

Page 6: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

6

>

1.3 Explanation of Symbols 34171

WARNING! Death or serious irreversible injuries may result.

CAUTION! Slight reversible injuries may result.

NOTICE! Property damage is to be expected or may result.

Important note Non-compliance can result in malfunction or interference

Information Supplementary note

► ... Request for action

> ... Reaction, result

→ ... "see"

abc Cross-reference

123 0x123 0b010

Decimal number Hexadecimal number Binary number

[...] Designation of pushbuttons, buttons or indications

Page 7: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

7

>

1.4 Overview: User documentation for AC1421/22 41793

ifm electronic provides the following user documentation for the models of the device class "AS-i Gateway mit EtherNet/IP-Device Schnittstelle":

Document Content / Description

Data sheet Technical data of the device as a table

Operating instructions * Notes on mounting and electrical installation of the device

Set-up, description of the operating and display elements, maintenance information, scaledrawing

Device manual Notes on operation of the device via GUI and web interface

Error elimination

Description of the fieldbus data

Supplement device manual Description of the acyclic data sets and the command interface

Programming manual Creation of a project with the device using CODESYS

Configuration of the device using CODESYS

Programming of the PLC of the device

Description of the device-specific CODESYS function libraries

*... The operating instructions are supplied with the device.

The user can download all documents from the ifm website.

>

1.5 Modification history 34492

Version Topic Date

00 New creation of document 12 / 2017

01 Update to Firmware 4.3.1

Changed: Restore device configuration

Page 8: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

8

2 Safety instructions Content

General safety instructions ....................................................................................................................... 8 Required background knowledge ............................................................................................................. 8 Tampering with the unit ............................................................................................................................ 8

28333 >

2.1 General safety instructions 41415

Read this document before setting up the product and keep it during the entire service life.

Only use the product for its intended purpose.

If the operating instructions or the technical data are not adhered to, personal injury and/or damage to property may occur.

Improper or non-intended use may lead to malfunctions of the device, to unwanted effects in the application or to a loss of the warranty claims.

The manufacturer assumes no liability for any consequences caused by tampering with the device or incorrect use by the operator.

► Observe these operating instructions.

► Adhere to the warning notes on the product. >

2.2 Required background knowledge 41648

This document is intended for specialists. Specialists are people who, based on their relevant training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards that may be caused during operation or maintenance of the product.

For programming these people should also have knowledge of control technology experience in PLC programming to IEC 61131-3.

The document contains information about the correct handling of the product. >

2.3 Tampering with the unit 33190

WARNING! Tampering with the unit.

> In case of non-compliance:

Possible affects on safety of operators and machinery

Expiration of liability and warranty

► Do not open the devices!

► Do not insert any objects into the devices!

► Prevent metal foreign bodies from penetrating!

Page 9: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

9

3 System description Content

Intended use ...........................................................................................................................................10 Information concerning the device .........................................................................................................11

28392

Page 10: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

10

>

3.1 Intended use

Content

Permitted use .........................................................................................................................................10 Prohibited use .........................................................................................................................................10

36928 >

3.1.1 Permitted use 41798

The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet.

The device may only be used for the following purposes:

as AS-i master in1 or 2 AS-i networks to control the data exchange to the sensor/actuator level

as gateway between the AS-i network and a higher-level controller (EtherNet/IP-Controller = Host; e.g. PLC) via the fieldbus interface

as Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) for program-based parameter setting, control and regulation of the AS-i slaves connected to the device

>

3.1.2 Prohibited use 34228

The device may not be used beyond the limits of the technical data (→ Technical data (→ S. 120))!

Page 11: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

11

>

3.2 Information concerning the device

Content

Overview .................................................................................................................................................11 Operating elements ................................................................................................................................12 Display elements ....................................................................................................................................12 CODESYS PLC ......................................................................................................................................12 Interfaces ................................................................................................................................................13 Required accessories .............................................................................................................................13

36905

>

3.2.1 Overview 41724

Legend:

Display

Status LED (H1)

2 function keys

4 arrow keys

Connector (X1) for AS-i 1, AS-i 2, functional earth

Connector (X2) for AUX (here with AUX jumper)

Front flap

Slot for SD card (behind the front flap)

EtherNet configuration interface (X3) (behind the front flap)

EtherNet/IP interface 1 (X7) with status LED (H4, H5)

EtherNet/IP interface 2 (X6) with status LED (H2, H3)

Page 12: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

12

>

3.2.2 Operating elements 36790

The device provides the following operating elements. >

Arrow and function keys 36959

Below the display is the key panel with two function keys and four arrow keys. The operator controls the Graphical User Interface (GUI) of the device with the keys.

Operating notes: → Operation (→ S. 14) >

3.2.3 Display elements 36917

The device provides the following display elements: >

Display 36894

The display is used to display the Graphical User Interface (GUI) of the device.

Operating notes: → Operation (→ S. 14)

Technical data: → Technical data (→ S. 120) >

Status LEDs 36784

The device features the following status LEDs which display the current status of system components.

Meaning of the LED colours and flashing frequencies: → Status LED (→ S. 113) >

3.2.4 CODESYS PLC 36953

The device features a Programmable Logic Controller (PLC). The PLC can run the following application types:

Applications that have been created with the IEC 61131-3 compliant programming software "CODESYS Development System" (from version V3.5 SP9 Patch 7 Hotfix 3)

System solutions that have been provided by ifm electronic

Technical data: → Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) (→ S. 121)

For information about the programming of the device-internal PLC with CODESYS, please refer to the programming manual: → www.ifm.com > product page > [Downloads]

Page 13: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

13

>

3.2.5 Interfaces 36927

The device provides the following interfaces: >

Ethernet configuration interface 41495

The configuration interface (X3) is located behind the front flap of the device. It allows the user to access the following device functions:

web interface for device configuration and diagnosis

programming of the device-internal PLC

Configuration as fieldbus interface

Possible network topologies: → Configuration interface: connection concepts (→ S. 123)

Technical data: → Technical data (→ S. 120) >

EtherNet/IP fieldbus interface 36925

The device communicates with the higher-level control instance of the EtherNet/IP network via the EtherNet/IP interface (X6/X7).

Notes regarding connetion concepts: → Configuration interface: connection concepts (→ S. 123)

Technical data: → Technical data (→ S. 120) >

SD card slot 36761

The SD card slot (X5) is located behind the front flap of the device. The following actions can be performed with an SD card:

update the firmware of the device

save/restore the device configuration

Technical data: → Technical data (→ S. 120) >

3.2.6 Required accessories 36764

To be able to operate the device in a sensible way you need the following accessories (not supplied with the device):

Depending on the selected voltage supply ( Operating instructions) you need:

a power supply for the 24 V power supply (e.g. art. no. DN3011)

for each AS-i master one AS-i power supply each (e.g. art. no. AC1236)

a data decoupling module AC1250 (accessory, optional)

AS-i slaves. >

Page 14: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

14

4 Operation Content

Control of the graphical user interface ...................................................................................................14 Menu view...............................................................................................................................................16 Page view ...............................................................................................................................................19 Remote access .......................................................................................................................................32

41713 >

4.1 Control of the graphical user interface 41568

Below the display is the key panel with six membrane keys. The operator controls the graphical user interface of the device with these keys. The key panel is closely linked to the navigation status bar.

Legend:

Label left function key

Navigation compass

Label right function key

Right function key

Left function key

[] arrow key

[] arrow key

[] arrow key

[] arrow key

Page 15: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

15

>

4.1.1 Function keys 41476

The two function keys allow the operator to trigger specified actions (e.g. tick a checkbox). The function of the function keys changes depending on the context.

The two text fields in the navigation status bar are associated with the function keys located directly below the display. They indicate the action that will be triggered if the function key is pressed in the current work step. If the function key is not labelled, it means that it has no function in the present situation.

Example (→ figure):

► The left function key triggers the action [Select].

► The right function key triggers the action [Back].

>

4.1.2 Arrow keys 7091

The fourarrow keys [], [], [] and [] can be used for navigation and selection.

The navigation compass shows which of the four arrow keys can be used in the respective work step.

Examples:

All arrow keys are active and will trigger a device response when pressed.

Only the arrow keys [] and [] are active and will trigger a device response when pressed.

Page 16: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

16

>

4.2 Menu view 41755

The menu view allows the user to select the menu page with the required control or display function.

Legend:

Info bar

Main navigation bar

Subnavigation bar 1

Subnavigation bar 2

Selected menu item (focus)

Navigation status bar with

labelling of the function keys

navigation compass

Long texts are displayed as scrolling text in the info bar.

>

4.2.1 Menu navigation 41756

The central operating elements in the menu view are the three navigation bars. They reflect the menu structure of the device software. Each navigation bar represents a menu level. The symbols in a navigation bar represent the submenus and menu items.

Rules for menu navigation:

► Use [] / [] to navigate within a menu level.

> The selected symbol has the focus (= orange frame).

> If the selected symbol has a submenu, the corresponding subnavigation bar will automatically appear.

► Use [] to go one menu level down.

► Use [] to go one menu level up.

At the lowest menu level:

► Press [Select] function key to go to the page of the selected menu item (→Page view (→ S. 19)).

In the main navigation bar:

► Press [Back] function key to return to the start screen (→Start screen (→ S. 36)).

Page 17: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

17

>

4.2.2 Navigation aids 41748

The following screen elements help you navigate through the menu:

> The info bar shows the navigation path of the selected menu symbol.

> The navigation compass shows which navigation steps are possible from the current position.

Legend:

Info bar

Navigation path to the focused menu element: [System] > [PLC] > [Setup]

Menu element with focus

Navigation path to the focused menu element:

> >

>

Example 41499

To access the menu page containing the setting options for the device-internal PLC:

1. > Initial position when accessing the menu screen

2. ► Use [] to select the [System] menu symbol.

> The focus is on the [System] menu symbol.

> The first subnavigation bar appears.

3. ► Use [] to change to the first subnavigation barh.

> The focus is on the [Diagnosis] menu symbol.

4. ► Use [] to select the [PLC] menu symbol.

> The focus is on the [PLC] menu symbol.

> The second subnavigation bar appears.

5. ► Use [] to change to the second subnavigation bar.

> The focus is on the [Information] menu symbol.

Page 18: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

18

6. ► Use [] to select the [Settings] menu symbol.

> The focus is on the [Settings] menu symbol.

► Press the [Select] function key to go to the page view of the [Settings] menu item.

> The page shows the setting options for the device-internal PLC.

Page 19: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

19

>

4.3 Page view 41786

The page view allows the user to select and execute a requested function.

Legend:

Info bar

Main navigation bar

Page

Scroll bar

Tab menu

Page element with focus

Navigation status bar with

labelling of function keys

navigation compass

>

4.3.1 Navigate on a page 41749

The page contains elements, that allow the operator to control the device or access information.

For page navigation, the following basic rules apply:

► Use the arrow keys [] / [] to change between the different page elements.

> The selected element is marked (= orange frame).

► Use the [Back] function key to return to the tab menu / menu view.

Rules for using the different control elements: →Description of the control elements (→ S. 20)

>

4.3.2 Use navigation aids 41678

The following aids offer navigation users additional orientation:

> The info bar shows detailed information about the selected element (focus).

Long texts are displayed as scrolling text in the info bar.

> The active menu symbol in the main navigation bar has a dark background.

> A scroll bar appears on the right side of the screen if the elements do not fit on the page.

> The navigation compass shows the navigation options in the active work step.

> The text fields in the navigation status bar show the current assignment of the function keys.

Page 20: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

20

>

4.3.3 Description of the control elements

Content

Tab menu/Tab ........................................................................................................................................21 Button .....................................................................................................................................................22 Checkbox ................................................................................................................................................22 List ..........................................................................................................................................................23 Slave selector .........................................................................................................................................24 Confirmation message ............................................................................................................................29 Numerical field ........................................................................................................................................30 Binary field ..............................................................................................................................................31

41586

A page consists of different control elements.

Page 21: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

21

>

Tab menu/Tab 41675

A tab menu groups together the different functions of a menu page. A tab menu consists of at least two tabs. A tab combines related functions.

Example:

> The focused tab has an orange background

> The info bar displays the name of the active tab (in this example: Errors / slave).

> The symbols and indicate that there are more tabs on the left and right sides of the visible tab.

> The page shows the control elements that belong to the currently selected tab.

Tabs can have the following background colours:

= Tab has the focus

= Tab is active

= Tab is inactive

Use:

1 Select the menu item

► Go to the menu item with the tab menu.

> The tab menu appears.

> The focus is on the left-hand tab.

2 Select a tab

► Use [] / [] arrow key to select the desired tab.

> The focus (orange background) moves to the selected tab:

> The page shows the functions of the selected tab.

3 Activate the menu page

► Press [Select] arrow key to go to the page that belongs to the active tab.

> When going to the page, the tab menu remains visible.

> The background colour of the active tab turns grey.

4 Carry out the desired functions

► Use [] to select and execute the desired function.

5 Change to tab menu

► Press [Back] function key to change to the tab menu.

> The focus (orange background) moves to the active tab.

Page 22: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

22

>

Button 41536

A button allows the operator to carry out a specified action once. The caption on the button describes the action.

Example:

Use:

1 Select a button

► Use the arrow keys [] / [] to select a button.

> The selected button gets an orange frame:

2 Activate the button

► Use [Select] function key to activate the selected button.

> The function is executed. >

Checkbox 41600

A checkbox permits the user to activate/deactivate a parameter. A checkbox control element consists of a checkbox and a caption.

Example:

Use:

1 Select a checkbox

► Use [] / [] arrow key to select the checkbox

> The focus (orange frame) moves to the selected checkbox

OR:

2 Check/uncheck a checkbox

► Use [Select] function key to check/uncheck the selected checkbox.

> The status change is indicated:

= checkbox is checked OR:

= checkbox is unchecked

The setting or clearing of a checkbox is not always immediately effective. Often the change must be confirmed by clicking a button (e.g. [Accept selection])!

Page 23: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

23

>

List 41484

A list provides a set of defined values. The operator can select precisely one value from this set (= 1 of n selection).

Examples:

= list without caption

= list with caption

Use:

1 Select a list

► Use [] / [] arrow key to select the list.

> The focus (orange frame) moves to the selected list.

> The list shows the active value: (in this exampleGateway).

2 Activate the list

► Use [Select] function key to open the list.

> The opened list shows the selectable values.

3 Select a value

► Use [] / [] arrow key to select the desired value from the list.

> The background colour of the selected value turns orange.

4 Apply the selected value

► Use [Select] function key to apply the selected value. OR: Use [Back] function key to quit and close the list.

> The list shows the selected value.

The set value will not always become effective immediately. Often the change must be confirmed by clicking a button (e.g. [Accept selection])!

Page 24: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

24

>

Slave selector

Content

Overview of slave states .........................................................................................................................25 Overview of free slave addresses ..........................................................................................................27

41653

The slave selector is used to select an AS-i slave or an AS-i address.

Legend:

Indicator of AS-i master operating mode

AS-i address symbol

Highlighted AS-i address (focus)

Status message of highlighted AS-i address

> The status LED indicates the active operating mode of the AS-i master: = AS-i master in protected mode = AS-i master in projection mode

> Every field represents an AS-i address. An AS-i address can be occupied by: – a single slave symbol – an A/B slave pair symbol

> The row and column headers help to locate the AS-i address. Example: address of the field selected in the picture – row header: 1x (= tens digit of the AS-i address)

– column header: 8 (= units digit of the AS-i address)

– type of slave: single slave (= symbol fully occupies the address field) – resulting AS-i address: 18

> The symbol of the A/B slave pair appears when an A or B slave is used on this address.

The slave selector is used in the following overviews:

Overview of slave states (→ Overview of slave states (→ S. 25))

Overview of free slave addresses (→ Overview of free slave addresses (→ S. 27))

Page 25: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

25

>

Overview of slave states 41728

> The slave selector shows an overview of the slaves in the selected AS-i network.

> The symbol colour signals the slave status. Meaning of symbols and colours: → Slave status: colour code + symbols (→ S. 26)

> The text field displays the status of the selected AS-i slave. Possible status messages:

Slave active

Not projected (= configuration error)

Double address (= double address error)

Periphery (= periphery fault)

Use:

1 Select an AS-i slave

► Use the arrow keys [], [], [] and [] to select the desired AS-i slave.

> The focus (= orange frame) is on the selected AS-i slave.

> The info bar shows the address of the selected AS-i slave.

> The text field shows a status message about the selected AS-i slave.

2 Activate the selected AS-i slave

► Use [Select] function key to activate the selected AS-i slave and go to the next menu page. OR: Use [Back] function key to cancel and leave the slave selector.

Page 26: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

26

>

Slave status: colour code + symbols 41652

Single slave A/B slave Colour Meaning

grey No slave found: slave address is neither in the LPS nor in the LDS

green Slave is activated ( in LAS)

red Configuration error type 1: slave is projected (in LPS) but was not found (in LDS)

yellow Slave signals a peripheral fault

pink Several slaves have the same address (double address error)

grey red Configuration error type 2:

the found slave (in LDS) is not projected (in LPS)

the found slave has another profile than projected

>

Meaning of the colour combinations (example: configuration error type 2) 41741

Symbol Colour Meaning

grey red grey

Configuration error type 2:

Single slave is projected (in LPS) but was not found (in LDS).

Instead, a new A slave with the same address was installed.

grey grey red

Configuration error type 2:

Single slave is projected (in LPS) but was not found (in LDS).

Instead, a new B slave with the same address was installed.

grey red Configuration error type 2:

A or B slave is projected (in LPS) but was not found (in LDS).

Instead, a new single slave with the same address was installed.

Page 27: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

27

>

Overview of free slave addresses 41729

In this overview, the slave selector shows the free and occupied AS-i addresses.

> The symbol colour indicates the state of the AS-i address. Meaning of symbols and colours: → Free slave addresses: colour code + symbols (→ S. 28)

> The text field displays the status of the selected AS-i slave. Possible status messages:

Free

Missing slave

Use:

1 Select the AS-i address

► Use the arrow keys [], [], [] and [] to select the desired AS-i address.

> The focus (= orange frame) is on the selected AS-i address.

> The info bar displays the selected AS-i address.

> The text field shows a status message for the selected AS-i address.

2 Activate the selected AS-i address

► Press [Select] function key to activate the selected AS-i address and go to the next menu page. OR: Press [Back] function key to cancel and leave the slave selector.

Page 28: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

28

>

Free slave addresses: colour code + symbols 41493

Single slave A/B slave Colour Meaning Prio.

grey Slave address is already used. --

turquoise Address is free according to LDS (= no slave found), however: address already belongs to a stored projection (= application profile).

1

blue Address is free according to LDS (= no slave found). Address is not used in a stored projection (= application profile).

2

>

Meaning of the colour combinations 41736

Symbol Colour Meaning

blue blue

Slave to be addressed is an A/B slave: A and B addresses are free.

blue grey

Slave to be addressed is an A/B slave: – A address is free. – B address is used.

grey blue

Slave to be addressed is an A/B slave: – A address is used. – B address is free.

turquoise turquoise

Slave to be addressed is an A/B slave: A and B addresses are free, but already used in a stored projection.

turquoise grey

Slave to be addressed is an A/B slave: – A address is free, but already used in a stored projection. – B address is used.

grey turquoise

Slave to be addressed is an A/B slave: – A address is used. – B address is free, but already used in a stored projection.

turquoise blue

Slave to be addressed is an A/B slave: – A address is free, but already used in a stored projection. – B address is free.

blue turquoise

Slave to be addressed is an A/B slave: – A address is free – B address is free, but already used in a stored projection.

Page 29: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

29

>

Confirmation message 41606

The confirmation message is a security prompt. It appears when important changes are made to the system settings. The confirmation message shows the changes made. For the changes to become effective, they first need to be acknowledged by the operator.

Example:

> Action: Change AS-i slave address from 1a to 1b

> Confirmation message shows:

Action (= Change AS-i address)

Slave address prior to change

Slave address after change

> The operator has the following input options:

[Select] function key

[Back] function key

Use:

1 Change the settings

► Change the system settings.

> The confirmation message appears.

2 Confirm the message

► Press [Select] function key to confirm the changes and apply the new value. OR: Press [Back] function key to reject the changes and continue to use the old value.

> The page displays the valid settings.

Page 30: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

30

>

Numerical field 41720

The numerical field allows the operator to enter integer values. The value range is context-specific. Numerical fields are part of the following GUI elements:

Control element Example Meaning

IP address

Entry of an IP address (IPv4) in [w.x.y.z] format

w | x | y | z = network segments (value range: 0... 255)

Date

Date entry in [yyyy-mm-ss] format

yyyy = year (value range: 0000 ... 9999)

mm = month (value range: 01 ... 12)

dd = day (value range: 01 ... 31)

Time

Time entry in [hh:mm:ss] format

hh = hours (value range: 00 ... 12)

mm = minutes (value range: 00 .... 59)

ss = seconds (value range: 00 ... 59)

The numerical field for seconds (ss) cannot be edited!

Analogue value

Entry of an analogue output value Value range (per numerical field): 0 ... 9

Use (using the example of the numerical date field):

1 Select a numerical field

► Use [] / [] arrow key to select the date control element.

> The focus (= orange frame) is on the selected date control element.

> The date control element displays the current date

2 Activate the editing mode

► Press [Select] function key to enter the editing mode.

> The focus (orange frame) is on the right element

3 Set the desired value

► Use [] / [] arrow key to increment the desired value.

> The segment displays the new value.

Press and hold the arrow key [] / [] to rapidly move through larger value ranges.

4 Select the next segment

► Use the arrow key [] / [] to mark the segment to be edited.

> The focus (orange frame) moves to the marked segment

► Optional: Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all segments have the desired values.

Page 31: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

31

5 Adopt the set values

► Use [Select] function key to confirm the set values and to leave the edit mode. OR: Use [Back] function key to reset the set values and to leave the edit mode.

> The date control element displays the valid date

The set value will not always become effective immediately. Often the change must be confirmed by clicking a button (e.g. [Accept selection])!

>

Binary field 41531

The binary field allows the operator to change a digital value bit-wise.

Example:

> Display of the 4-bit digital value:

Binary representation

= bit is on (= 1).

= bit is off (= 0).

Hexadecimal representation: 0xf = 1111

Use:

1 Select the binary field

► Use [] / [] arrow key to select the binary field.

> The focus (orange frame) is on the selected binary field.

> The control element shows the current value (digital and hexadecimal).

2 Activate the editing mode

► Press [Select] function key to enter the editing mode.

> The focus (orange frame) is on the right element.

3 Set the desired value

► Use [] / [] arrow key to set the desired value.

> The control element shows the new value in digital and hexadecimal format.

4 Select the next segment

► Use [] / [] arrow key to mark the segment to be edited.

> The focus (orange frame) is on the selected segment.

► Optional: Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all segments have the desired values.

5 Apply the set values

► Use [Select] function key to confirm the set values and to leave the edit mode. OR: Use [Back] function key to reset the set values and to leave the edit mode.

> The binary field displays the current value (binary and hexadecimal).

Page 32: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

32

>

4.4 Remote access

Content

General ...................................................................................................................................................32 Recommended browsers ........................................................................................................................32 Operating instructions .............................................................................................................................33

41775

The device has an integrated web server. It generates a web interface which allows remote access to all device functions via an web browser. The web-interface allows the operator to easily configure, parameterise and monitor the device in permanent operation via an ethernet-based network. >

4.4.1 General 41475

The operating concept of the web interface follows the same philosophy as the operating concept of the local display. The web interface uses the same menu items, the same menu structure and the same symbols as the graphic user interface of the local display.

Observe notes regarding the additional functionality of the web interface: → Additional functions (→ S. 37)

>

4.4.2 Recommended browsers 41777

Use one of the following Internet browsers to correctly display the HTML pages of the web interface:

Microsoft Internet Explorer (from version 8.0)

Mozilla Firefox (from version 3.5)

Page 33: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

33

>

4.4.3 Operating instructions 41723

>

Web interface: Access 41681

► PC / Laptop / mobile device: Start Internet browser.

► Internet browser: Enter IP address of the device in the address line (e.g. 192.168.82.2)

> Internet browser displays the start page of the web interface. >

Web interface: Navigation 41680

In the web interface, the pointing device (e.g. mouse, touchpad) is used instead of the following key functions:

Navigation functions of the arrow keys [], [], [], []

Selecting functiions of the function keys [Select] and [Back]

Example:

To select > :

► Place the cursor on symbol [AS-i 1] in the main navigation bar.

> Symbol [AS-i 1] has the focus.

> Subnavigation bar appears.

> Navigation trail shows actual position in the menu tree: AS-i 1

► Place the cursor on symbol [Diagnosis] in the subnavigation bar.

> Symbol [Diagnosis] has the focus.

> Navigation trail shows actual position in the menu tree: AS-i 1 > Diagnosis

► Click on symbol [Diagnosis]

> Web browser shows menu page [Diagnosis]

Page 34: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

34

>

Web interface: Password protection 41679

The web server has a basic password protection to prevent unwanted or unauthorised changes to the device settings via the web interface.

When the web interface is accessed, a status bar at the top shows if the user is logged in or logged out:

User is logged in:

Full access to device settings

Full access to diagnostics and information data

User is logged out:

No access to device settings

Access to diagnostics and information data

The password is: CAFE

The password protection cannot be deactivated! The password cannot be changed!

>

Web interface login 41676

► Go to the web interface (→ Operating instructions (→ S. 33)).

> At the top of the web interface, the status bar displays the following status message:

► Enter the fixed password in the [Password:] field.

► Click [Login] to log in to the web interface.

> The status bar displays the changed status:

> The operator has unlimited access to all menus and functions of the web interface.

The operator remains logged in if one of the following actions is carried out:

the web browser is closed and reopened

the PC/laptop is restarted

AC1421/22 is restarted

To prevent unauthorised access to the device settings:

► Manually log off before you leave the web interface! (→ Disconnect from web interface (→ S. 35))

► Remember to turn off the "Save password" function of your web browser before accessing the web interface!

► If the "Save password" function of your web browser is not turned off: delete the stored passwords in your browser settings!

Page 35: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

35

>

Disconnect from web interface 41457

To log out of the web interface:

► Start web interface

> Status line with status message is displayed at the top of the web interface:

► Log out of the web interface by clicking [Logout]

> Status bar shows changed status

> User can only access menus in the web interface containing diagnostic and information data.

> An error message is displayed when a user in the web interface accesses a menu with device settings.

The user stays logged into the web interface even when the web browser is closed and then restarted.

To prevent unauthorised access to the device settings:

► After finishing the access via the web browser manually log out of the device web interface!

► When passwort memory function of the web browser is not deactivated: Delete all saved passwords in the browser settings!

Page 36: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

36

5 Menu Content

Start screen ............................................................................................................................................36 Menu functions .......................................................................................................................................37 Quick setup .............................................................................................................................................38 AS-i 1 / AS-i 2 .........................................................................................................................................48 System ....................................................................................................................................................59 Interfaces ................................................................................................................................................81 ifm system solutions ...............................................................................................................................97

41740

This chapter describes the menu functions of the device’s graphical user interface. >

5.1 Start screen 41690

When starting the device, the start screen of the graphical user interface appears (special case: system start after initial commissioning or firmware update: →Start screen 'Basic settings' (→ S. 105)). The start screen displays the status information of important system components. Moreover, the graphical user interface is accessed and operated from the start screen.

AS-i Master 1 operation mode →Operating mode of the AS-i master (→ S. 114)

AS-i Master 2 operation mode →Operating mode of the AS-i master (→ S. 114) only available for devices with 2 AS-i masters

Control instance of the AS-i slave outputs →Control instance of the AS-i outputs (→ S. 114)

Status of the EtherNet/IP connection →Fieldbus status (→ S. 114)

► Press [Menu] function key to go to the menu (→Menu functions (→ S. 37))

OR:

► Press [OSC] function key to go to the Online Support Center (→Online Support Center (OSC) (→ S. 116))

Page 37: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

37

>

5.2 Menu functions 41739

The main navigation bar of the AC1421/22 provides access to the following menus:

Symbol Description

Access to the most important device functions →System (→ S. 59)

Configuration and diagnostics of the AS-i 1 network (AS-i master, AS-i slaves) →AS-i 1 / AS-i 2 (→ S. 48)

Configuration and diagnostics of the AS-i 2 network (AS-i master, AS-i slaves)* →AS-i 1 / AS-i 2 (→ S. 48)

Configuration and diagnostics of the device, control of the device-internal PLC →System (→ S. 59)

Configuration and diagnostics of the interfaces (EtherNet/IP, Configuration interface) →Interfaces (→ S. 81)

Online Support Centre** →Online Support Center (OSC) (→ S. 116)

Control and administration of the ifm system solutions (ifm apps)** →ifm system solutions (→ S. 97)

* ... only available for devices with 2 AS-i masters ** ... only available via the web interface of the device

>

5.2.1 Additional functions 41548

The web interface provides the following extra features compared to the user interface of the display:

Download Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) (→ Download the device and I/O description (→ S. 88))

Download description of inputs/outputs (→ Download the device and I/O description (→ S. 88))

Adopt date and time settings of the PC/laptop (→ Adopt the system time of the PC (→ S. 75))

Save diagnostics protocol (→ Store diagnostic protocol (→ S. 79))

Use ifm system solutions (→ ifm system solutions (→ S. 97))

Diagnostics indication (→ Start screen: Status LEDs (→ S. 114))

Page 38: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

38

>

5.3 Quick setup 41409

The [Quick setup] menu provides fast access to the most important device functions.

Navigation path Functions

→ Quick setup: Project AS-i networks (→ S. 39) → Quick setup: Configure the operating mode of the AS-i masters (→ S. 40) → Quick setup: Configure the output access (→ S. 41) → Quick setup: Access the device via QR code (→ S. 41) → Quick setup: Configure the EtherNet/IP interface (→ S. 41) → Quick setup: Set the configuration mode (→ S. 43) → Quick setup: Set the Configuration intertace (→ S. 44) → Quick setup: Address the AS-i slaves connected to AS-i Master 1 (→ S. 46) → Quick setup: Address the AS-i slaves connected to AS-i Master 2 (→ S. 47)

Page 39: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

39

>

5.3.1 Quick setup: Project AS-i networks 41782

During projection adaptation, the AS-i master carries out the following actions:

The configuration data of all detected AS-i slaves (LDS) is saved

The detected AS-i slaves are added to the list of projected slaves (LPS)

During a project a projection adaptation all output parameters of the unconnected AS-i slaves are reset to their default value in the AS-i master (single /A slaves = 0xF, B slaves = 0x7).

To carry out the projection adaptation on AS-i master 1 and/or AS-i master 2:

1 Select menu page

► Select tab [Project all].

2 Select the AS-i master for projection adaptation

► Set the following parameters as required:

Parameter Description Possible values

[AS-i Master 1] Select AS-i Master 1 for projection adaptation

Exclude AS-i Master 1 from projection adaptation

Include AS-i Master 1 in projection adaptation

[AS-i Master 2] Select AS-i Master 2 for projection adaptation (only available for devices with 2 AS-i masters)

Exclude AS-i Master 2 from projection adaptation

Include AS-i Master 2 in projection adaptation

3 Start the projection adaptation

► Activate the button [Start projection process].

> The selected AS-i masters go into the "projection mode".

> A projection adaptation is carried out on the selected AS-i masters.

> After projection adaptation, the selected AS-i masters go into the "protected mode".

Page 40: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

40

>

5.3.2 Quick setup: Configure the operating mode of the AS-i masters 41778

Information regarding the operating modes of an AS-i master:→ Operating modes of the AS-i master (→ S. 126)

To configure the operating modes of the AS-i masters:

1 Select the menu page

► Select [Operation modes] tab.

2 Configure the operating mode of AS-i master 1 and the behaviour of the connected AS-i slaves

> In group [AS-i master 1], set the following parameters as required:

Parameter Description Possible values

[Projection mode] Active operating mode of the AS-i master

Projection mode inactive: AS-i network runs in protected mode (normal mode)

Projection mode active: AS-i network can be projected. (→ Quick setup: Address the AS-i slaves connected to AS-i Master 1 (→ S. 46) or → Quick setup: Address the AS-i slaves connected to AS-i Master 2 (→ S. 47))

[No slave reset] Behaviour of the AS-i slaves when changing the operating mode

Slave is reset when changing the operating mode: When changing the operating mode, the AS-i slaves will be reset for a short moment (reset or offline phase).

Slave is not reset when changing the operating mode: When changing the operating mode, the AS-i slaves continue to operate without interruption.

> Selected values are applied.

3 Optional: set the operating mode of AS-i master 2 and the behaviour of the AS-i slaves

► Repeat step 2 for the group [AS-i master 2].

Page 41: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

41

>

5.3.3 Quick setup: Configure the output access 41783

Only one control instance at a time can have write access to the outputs of the connected AS-i slaves. The operator configures the control instance with the parameter [Output access].

To configure the control instance of the AS-i slave outputs:

1 Select the menu page

► Select [Operation modes] tab.

2 Set the control instance for the outputs of the AS-i slaves

► From the list [Output access], select the desired value:

Parameter Description Possible values

[Output access] Control instance of the AS-i slave outputs

[Gateway] A higher-level PLC controls the outputs of the AS-i slaves.

[Manual] The operator controls the outputs of the AS-i slaves via the graphical user interface.

[PLC] The device-internal PLC controls the outputs of the AS-i slaves.

3 Save the changes

► Press [Accept selection] to save the changes.

> The selected instance controls the outputs of the AS-i slaves. >

5.3.4 Quick setup: Access the device via QR code 41765

The QR code (Quick Response Code) allows the operator to access the web interface of the device from a smartphone or tablet PC.

Requirements:

The AS-i device must be connected to a wireless LAN router with switch functionality. (→Connection via Ethernet network (→ S. 124))

The smartphone/tablet PC is connected to the wireless LAN router.

The smartphone/tablet PC provides a camera function.

The smartphone/tablet PC has a QR-code reader installed.

1 Select menu page

► Select the [QR-Code] tab.

> The display shows the QR code.

2 Read the QR code

► Start the QR code reading app and scan the QR code.

> The smartphone displays the web interface of the device (→Remote access (→ S. 32)).

>

5.3.5 Quick setup: Configure the EtherNet/IP interface 41780

The device provides the following options for configuration of the EtherNet/IP interface:

Page 42: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

42

Manual = The operator sets the interface parameters (IP address, network mask, gateway address) manually.

Automatic = The interface parameters are automatically set through one of the following protocols.

– Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) – Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP)

In order to obtain the interface parameters automatically via DHCP or BOOTP, the device must be connected to a DHCP or BOOTP server.

► Enable the DHCP/BOOTP server on the fieldbus controller.

► Connect the EtherNet/IP interface (X6/X7) to a DHCP/BOOTP server.

To configure the IP parameters of the EtherNet/IP interface:

1 Select the menu page

► Select [EtherNet/IP] tab.

2 Display the current settings

> The parameters below show the active settings:

Parameter Description Possible values

[IP mode] active configuration method [Static] The operator sets the IP parameters manually.

[DHCP] The interface receives the IP parameters from a DHCP server.

[BOOTP] The interface receives the IP parameters from a BOOTP server.

[IP address] IP address of the interface e.g. 192.168.10.100

[Subnet mask] Network mask of the network segment

e.g. 255.255.255.0

[Gateway address] IP address of the network gateway

e.g. 192.168.10.1

► Select one of the following actions: – Configure the IP parameters manually: continue with → step 3 – Configure the IP parameters automatically: continue with → step 4

3 Configure the IP parameters manually

► From the list [IP mode], select the value Static.

► Set the following parameters as required: – [IP address] – [Subnet mask] – [Gateway address]

► Press [Accept] to save the changes.

► Continue with → step 5

Page 43: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

43

4 Configure the IP parameters automatically

► From the list [IP mode], select either DHCP or BOOTP.

► Press [Accept] to save the changes.

> The device receives the IP parameters from a DHCP or BOOTP server.

The automatic configuration of the interface can take up to 10 seconds.

5 Display the current settings

> The parameters (→ step 2) show the active IP settings of the EtherNet/IP interface. >

5.3.6 Quick setup: Set the configuration mode 41774

The device can be configured in two different ways:

Top-down mode: The device-specific parameters and the module configuration are set via the projection software of the EtherNet/IP controller.

Independent mode: The parameters of the EtherNet/IP interface are set via the graphical user interface of the device.

More information:→ Configuration mode (→ S. 195)

1 Select the menu page

► Select [EtherNet/IP] tab.

2 Set the configuration mode

► Set the following parameters as required:

Parameter Description Possible values

[Configuration mode] Active configuration mode of the device

[Top-Down ] The device-specific parameters and the module configuration are set via the projection software of the EtherNet/IP controller.

[Independent] The parameters of the EtherNet/IP interface are set via the graphical user interface of the device.

3 Save the changes

► Press [Accept selection] to save the changes.

> The selected instance controls the outputs of the AS-i slaves.

Page 44: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

44

>

5.3.7 Quick setup: Set the Configuration interface 41781

The device provides the following options for configuration of the Ethernet Configuration interface:

Manual = The operator sets the interface parameters (IP address, network mask, gateway address) manually.

Automatic = The interface parameters are set automatically. The operator can choose between these protocols:

– Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) – Zero Configuration Networking (Zeroconf)

The device must be connected to a DHCP server to automatically receive the interface parameters via DHCP.

► Connect the configuration interface (X3) to a DHCP server.

To configure the IP parameters of the configuration interface:

1 Select the menu page

► Select [Config. interface X3] tab.

2 Show the active settings

> The parameters below show the active settings:

Parameter Description Possible values

[Optain IP address autom.]

Active method for the configuration of the interface parameters

Manual assignment of the interface parameters through the operator

Automatic assignment of the interface parameters

[IP status] Configuration protocol used [Static] The operator sets the IP parameters manually.

[DHCP] The IP parameters are set by a DHCP server.

[Zeroconfig] The IP parameters are set automatically with the Zeroconf protocol.

[IP address] IP address of the interface e.g. 192.168.0.100

[Subnet mask] Network mask of the network segment

e.g. 255.255.255.0

[Gateway address] IP address of the network gateway

e.g. 192.168.0.1

► Take one of the following actions: – Configure the IP parameters manually: continue with → step 3 – Configure the IP parameters automatically: continue with → step 4

3 Configure the IP parameters manually

► Uncheck [Optain IP address autom].

► Set the following parameters as required: – [IP address] – [Subnet mask] – [Gateway address]

► Press [Accept] to save the changes.

Page 45: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

45

► Continue with → step 5

4 Configure the IP parameters automatically

► Check [Optain IP address autom].

► Press [Accept] to save the changes.

> The device tries to obtain IP parameters from a DHCP server.

> If the IP parameter configuration via DHCP server fails, the device will generate the IP parameters by means of the Zeroconf protocol.

The automatic configuration of the interface takes approx. 10 seconds.

5 Show the current settings

> The parameters (→ step 2) show the active IP settings of the Configuration interface.

Page 46: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

46

>

5.3.8 Quick setup: Address the AS-i slaves connected to AS-i Master 1 41764

To change the address of an AS-i slave connected to AS-i Master 1:

1 Select the menu page

► Select [Addressing AS-i 1] tab.

2 Select the AS-i slave

> The page provides an overview of the current addressing and status of the AS-i slaves on the selected AS-i master (→ figure) Notes on colour codes: → Overview of slave states (→ S. 25)

► Select the AS-i slave of which want to change the address.

► Use [Select] to activate the selected AS-i slave.

3 Select a new AS-i address

> The page provides an overview of the free AS-i addresses (→ figure) Notes on colour codes: → Overview of free slave addresses (→ S. 27)

► Select the address to be assigned to the AS-i slave.

► Assign the selected address with [Select].

> The confirmation prompt appears.

► Confirm the message with [OK].

> The AS-i slave has new address.

> The page provides an overview of the current addressing and configuration errors (→ figure)

4 Address additional AS-i slaves (optional)

► Repeat steps 2 and 3 to address additional AS-i slaves.

After the address change, the present configuration no longer corresponds to the stored configuration.

> The slave status indicates a configuration error.

To eliminate the configuration error:

► Start a projection adaptation (→ Quick setup: Project AS-i networks (→ S. 39)).

Page 47: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

47

>

5.3.9 Quick setup: Address the AS-i slaves connected to AS-i Master 2 41763

The procedure for addressing the AS-i slaves connected to AS-i Master 2 is the same as for addressing the AS-i slaves connected to AS-i Master 1 (→ Quick setup: Address the AS-i slaves connected to AS-i Master 1 (→ S. 46)).

To change the address of an AS-i slave connected to AS-i Master 2

1 Select the menu page

► Select [Addressing AS-i 2] tab.

2 Change the AS-i slave address

► Address AS-i slaves.

Page 48: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

48

>

5.4 AS-i 1 / AS-i 2 41522

The [AS-i 1] and [AS-i 2] menus provide access to configuration functions of the AS-i networks.

The [AS-i 2] menu is only available for devices with two AS-i masters!

Navigation path Content

>

>

AS-i master settings → Set the operating mode of the AS-i master (→ S. 49) → Carry out a projection adaptation (→ S. 50) → Set the monitoring functions of the AS-i master (→ S. 50)

>

>

AS-i network diagnosis → Display and reset the error counters (→ S. 51) → Display the error statistics of the AS-i slaves (→ S. 51) → Display the voltage supply analysis (→ S. 52) → Display and reset performance data (→ S. 52)

>

>

AS-i slave settings → Display the input/output data of the AS-i slave (→ S. 53) → Change the digital output values manually (→ S. 55) → Change the analogue output values manually (→ S. 55) → Show AS-i slave information (→ S. 56) → Change an AS-i slave address (→ S. 57) → Change an AS-i slave parameter output (→ S. 57) → Change the Extended ID1 of the AS-i slave (→ S. 58)

Page 49: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

49

>

5.4.1 AS-i 1 / AS-i 2: Master setup 41537

The menu item [Master setup] provides access to the configuration options of the selected AS-i master. >

Set the operating mode of the AS-i master 41640

More information on the operating modes of the AS-i master: → Operating modes of the AS-i master (→ S. 126)

To set the operating mode of the AS-i master:

1 Select the menu page

► > or >

2 Set the operating mode of AS-i master 1 and the behaviour of the connected AS-i slaves

> Set the following parameters as required:

Parameter Description Possible values

[Projection mode] Active operating mode of the AS-i master

Projection mode inactive: AS-i network operates in protected mode (normal mode)

Projection mode active: AS-i network can be projected.

[No slave reset] Behaviour of the AS-i slaves when changing the operating mode

Slave is reset when changing the operating mode: When changing the operating mode, the AS-i slaves will be reset for a short moment (reset or offline phase).

Slave is not reset when changing the operating mode: When changing the operating mode, the AS-i slaves continue to operate without interruption.

> Selected values are applied.

Page 50: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

50

>

Carry out a projection adaptation 41535

During projection adaptation, the AS-i master stores the configuration of all AS-i slaves currently found on the AS-i network in its memory and assigns a valid AS-i address to each of them.

The projection adaptation can only be carried out in projection mode:

► [Projection mode] must be checked (→Set the operating mode of the AS-i master (→ S. 49)).

► During a Projection process all output parameter of not connected AS- slaves in the AS-i master will be reset to their default values (single / A slaves = 0xF, B slaves = 0x7).

To launch the projection adaptation:

1 Select the menu page

► > or >

2 Carry out a projection adaptation

► Press [Start projection process] button.

> The projection adaptation is carried out.

If successful:

> All slaves on the AS-i master are projected.

If not successful:

> The Online Support Center displays an error message.

► Remove the error and repeat the process. >

Set the monitoring functions of the AS-i master 41641

To set the monitoring functions of the selected AS-i master:

1 Select the menu page

► > or >

2 Set the monitoring functions of the AS-i master

► Set the following parameters as required:

Parameter Description Possible values

[Automatic addressing] Behaviour if AS-i slave is replaced (→ Protected mode (→ S. 126))

Automatic addressing disabled

Automatic addressing enabled

[Earth fault detection] Detection of earth faults Do not detect earth faults in the AS-i system

Detect earth faults in the AS-i system

[Double address detection] Double address detection Do not detect AS-i slaves with the same address

Detect AS-i slaves with the same address

> Selected values are applied.

Page 51: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

51

>

5.4.2 AS-i 1 / AS-i 2: Diagnosis 41538

The [Diagnosis] menu provides access to the diagnostic data of the selected AS-i network. >

Display and reset the error counters 41445

To display and reset the AS-i error counters:

1 Select the menu page

► > or >

► Select [Error counters] tab.

2 Display the error counters

> Page shows the following information:

Name Description

[Telegrams] Number of message errors that occurred

[Configuration] Number of configuration errors that occurred

[Voltage < 22.5V] Number of voltage errors < 22.5 V

[Voltage < 19.0V] Number of voltage errors < 19.0 V

[Earth fault] Number of detected earth faults

3 Optional: reset the error counters

► Press [Reset] button.

> All error counters are reset to 0. >

Display the error statistics of the AS-i slaves 41437

To display the error messages of the AS-i slaves on the selected AS-i master:

1 Select the menu page

► > or >

► Select [Errors / slave] tab.

2 Display the error statistics of the AS-i slaves

> Page shows the following information:

Column header Description

[Address] Address of the AS-i slave

[S/A] Number of errors of the single or A slave at this address

[B] Number of errors of the B slave at this address

► Use [] / [] to scroll through the table.

Page 52: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

52

>

Display the voltage supply analysis 41502

To display the voltage supply analysis:

1 Select the menu page

► > or >

► Select [Power supply] tab.

2 Display the voltage supply analysis

> Page shows the following information:

Name Description Possible values

[Power supply] Method of voltage supply [Aux] Voltage is supplied separately by the AS-i network and AUX 24 V.

[AS-i] Voltage is only supplied by the AS-i network.

[Power24] Voltage is supplied by data decoupling module.

[AS-i voltage] AS-i voltage measured (in [V]) e.g. 30.3 V

[DC earth fault] Evaluation of the network symmetry

AS-i network is symmetrical

AS-i network is asymmetrical

AS-i network has earth fault

Graphical representation of the network symmetry:

>

Display and reset performance data 41460

To display the performance statistics of the selected AS-i master:

1 Select the menu page

► > or >

► Select [Performance] tab.

2 Display performance data

> Page shows the following information:

Designation Description

[Activated slaves] Number of active AS-i slaves on the AS-i network

[AS-i cycle time [ms]] AS-i cycle time (value in [ms])

[minimum] shortest cycle time

[maximum] longest cycle time

[current] current cycle time

3 Optional: reset the performance data

► Press [Reset] button.

> The saved statistic data for minimum and maximum cycle times are deleted.

Page 53: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

53

>

5.4.3 AS-i 1 / AS-i 2: AS-i slaves 41539

The [AS-i Slaves] menu provides access to information and configuration options of the AS-i slaves.

The scope of configuration options shown ([Data] and [Setup] tab) varies according to the status of the selected AS-i slaves.

>

Display the input/output data of the AS-i slave 41438

To display the input/output data or the parameter output of the selected AS-i slaves:

1 Select the menu page

► > or >

► Select an AS-i slave (→Slave selector (→ S. 24)).

► Select [Data] tab.

2 Display input/output data

> Depending on the profile of the selected AS-i slave, the page displays the following data: >

Digital input 41464

Name Description Example / Possible values

[Inputs] Current values of the digital inputs (binary and hexadecimal representation)

Data bit is switched off (0 / OFF)

Data bit is switched on (1 / ON)

>

Analogue input 41528

Name Description Example / Possible values

[Inputs] Current values of the analogue input channels and information about their status

[Valid] The Valid bit indicates whether the displayed value is valid.

Invalid value

Valid value

[Overflow] The Overflow bit indicates whether the displayed value is within the value range.

Value within valid value range

Valid value range exceeded

Page 54: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

54

>

Digital output 41465

Designation Description Example / Possible values

[Outputs] Current values of the digital outputs (binary and hexadecimal representation)

Data bit is switched off (0 / OFF)

Data bit is switched on (1 / ON)

[Jog mode] The parameter controls the behaviour of the outputs in the event of a changed output value.

Jog mode disabled ("switch mode")

> The changes do not affect the output until you quit the editing mode.

Jog mode enabled ("momentary switch mode")

> The changes immediately affect the output.

>

Analogue output 41521

Name Description Example / Possible values

[Outputs] Current values of the analogue output channels and information about their status

[Analogue status]

Current status of the analogue outputs Not O.K.

O.K.

[Channel x] Current value of the analogue output channel x (x = 1...n; n = number of channels per AS-i slave)

per digit: 0 ... 9

>

Parameter input 41787

Name Description Example / Possible values

[Parameter input] Current value of the parameter input (binary and hexadecimal representation)

Data bit is switched off (0 / OFF)

Data bit is switched on (1 / ON)

Page 55: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

55

>

Change the digital output values manually 41602

WARNING! The manual change of digital output values may cause undesired consequences to the control process.

> Risk of personal injury!

> Risk of material damage to the machine/plant!

The operator is responsible for any consequences caused by the manual change of the digital ouput values!

► Secure the concerned area.

► Only trained personnel is allowed to set outputs manually.

If the jog mode is deactivated: After changing the slave outputs the output values remain on the changed values.

► Change the inverted outputs again immediately to the original values after the end of the test!

To change the digital output values of an AS-i slave manually:

1 Enable manual access to the outputs

► Set [Output access] parameter = Manual (→Set the output access (→ S. 67)).

2 Select the menu page

► > or >

► Select an AS-i slave (→Slave selector (→ S. 24)).

► Select [Data] tab.

3 Set the digital output values manually

> The group [Outputs] displays the current value of the digital output (binary and hexadecimal representation).

► Set [Jog mode] as required. (→Digital output (→ S. 54))

► Change the desired output value bit by bit.

> Selected value is applied. >

Change the analogue output values manually 41598

To change the analogue output values of an AS-i slave manually:

1 Enable manual access to the outputs

► Set [Output access] parameter = Manual (→Set the output access (→ S. 67)).

2 Select the menu page

► > or >

► Select an AS-i slave (→Slave selector (→ S. 24)).

► Select [Data] tab.

3 Set the analogue output values manually

> [Outputs] group shows the current value of the analogue output.

► Change the value of the requested channel one digit at a time (→Numerical field (→ S. 30)).

> Selected value is applied.

► Optional: repeat step 3 to change further channels. >

Page 56: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

56

Show AS-i slave information 41643

To display information about an AS-i slave:

1 Select the menu page

► > or >

► Select an AS-i slave (→Slave selector (→ S. 24)).

► Select [Information] tab.

2 Display information about the AS-i slave

> Page shows the following information:

Name Description Possible values

[AS-i slave addess] Current address of the AS-i slave e.g. 13B

[Slave status] Current status of the AS-i slave AS-i slave is active

AS-i slave is missing

Not projected

Double address error

Periphery fault

[AS-i slave profile] Current (= Current) and expected (= Preset) slave profile (IO, ID, ID2, ID1) in hexadecimal format

► Use [] / [] for page navigation.

Page 57: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

57

>

Change an AS-i slave address 41534

To change the address of an AS-i slave:

1 Select the menu page

► > or >

► Select an AS-i slave (→Slave selector (→ S. 24)).

► Select [Setup] tab.

2 Change the address of the AS-i slave

► Press the [Change slave address] button.

> The page displays an overview of the free AS-i addresses (→ Overview of free slave addresses (→ S. 27)).

► Select the address to be assigned to the AS-i slave and confirm with [Select] function key.

> Security prompt appears.

► Press [OK] to confirm the security prompt.

> The AS-i slave has a new address.

> The page displays an overview of the AS-i slave states (→ Overview of slave states (→ S. 25)).

3 Optional: change further AS-i addresses.

► Repeat step 2 to change further AS-i slave addresses.

After the address change, the present configuration (LDS) no longer corresponds to the stored configuration (LPS).

> The OSC displays a configuration error.

To remove the configuration error:

► start a projection adaptation (→ Carry out a projection adaptation (→ S. 50)).

>

Change an AS-i slave parameter output 41599

To change the parameter output of an AS-i slave:

1 Enable manual access to the outputs

► Set [Output access] parameter = Manual (→Set the output access (→ S. 67))

2 Select the menu page

► > or >

► Select an AS-i slave (→Slave selector (→ S. 24)).

► Select [Setup] tab.

3 Change the parameter output of the AS-i slave

> The [Parameter output] group displays the current assignment of the parameter output (binary and hexadecimal representation).

► Adjust the desired output value one position at a time.

> Selected value is applied.

Page 58: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

58

>

Change the Extended ID1 of the AS-i slave 41601

To set the Extended ID1 of an AS-i slave:

1 Select the menu page

► > or >

► Select an AS-i slave (→Slave selector (→ S. 24)).

► Select [Setup] tab.

2 Set the Extended ID1

> The [ID1] list displays the current Extended ID1 value (hexadecimal format).

► Select the desired value for Extended ID1 from the [ID1] list.

> Selected value is applied.

After changing the Extended ID1, the existing configuration no longer corresponds to the stored configuration:

> An error message appears (configuration error).

► Start a projection adaptation (→Carry out a projection adaptation (→ S. 50)).

Page 59: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

59

>

5.5 System 41700

The [System] menu provides access to functions that allow configuration of the system and the device-internal PLC.

Navigation path Functions

>

Device-internal PLC →System: Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) (→ S. 60)

>

System information →Show version information (→ S. 66)

>

System settings →Set the output access (→ S. 67) →Enable/Disable the device-internal PLC (→ S. 68) →Set the device cycle (→ S. 69) →Switch the menu language (→ S. 70) →Set the behaviour of the display (→ S. 71) →Set the system time manually (→ S. 73) →Synchronise the system time with an NTP server (→ S. 74) →Adopt the system time of the PC (→ S. 75) →Export device configuration (→ S. 77) →Import device configuration (→ S. 78) →System reset (→ S. 79) →Store diagnostic protocol (→ S. 79)

>

System diagnostics →Display diagnostic data (→ S. 80)

Page 60: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

60

>

5.5.1 System: Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) 41671

The [PLC] menu provides access to the device-internal PLC.

Navigation path Functions

> >

PLC information: → Display the status of the CODESYS PLC (→ S. 61) → Display information about PLC projects (→ S. 61)

> >

PLC settings → Control a single PLC application (→ S. 62) → Control PLC applications (→ S. 63) → Show target visualisation (→ S. 64)

> >

PLC diagnosis → Show memory used (→ S. 65)

For information about the programming of the device-internal PLC with CODESYS, please refer to the programming manual: → www.ifm.com > product page > [Downloads]

Page 61: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

61

>

PLC: Information 41796

The [Information] menu item provides access to the PLC status and project information. >

Display the status of the CODESYS PLC 41467

To display information about the current status of the device-internal PLC:

1 Select the menu page

► > >

► Select [Status] tab.

2 Display the status of the CODESYS PLC

> Page shows the following information:

Name Description Possible values

Status LED Status of the device-internal PLC The CODESYS PLC is disabled.

The CODESYS PLC is enabled.

[Version] CODESYS version e.g. 3.5.3.60

[Node name] Name of device in CODESYS project e.g. ifm_SmartPLC_StandardLine

>

Display information about PLC projects 41440

To obtain information about the CODESYS project stored on the device-internal PLC:

1 Select the menu page

► > >

► Select [Project] tab.

2 Display information about PLC projects

> Page shows the following information:

Name Description

[Project] Name of the CODESYS project file

[Title] Name of the CODESYS project

[Version] Version number of the CODESYS project

[Author] Author of the CODESYS project

Page 62: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

62

>

PLC: Settings 41801

The [Settings] menu item provides access to the PLC applications (apps) on the device. >

Control a single PLC application 41576

[App x/y]

– x ... number of the app displayed – y ... total number of apps stored

Status and name of the application

= application has been stopped

= application has been started

Information concerning the application – date and time of creation – author – version of application – size

To control a single PLC application stored on the device:

1 Select the menu page

► > >

► Select [Applications] tab.

2 Select an application

► Use [] to select the message field.

> The focus (orange frame) is on the message field.

► Use [] / [] to select the requested application.

► Perform one of the following actions: – Launch a single PLC application: continue with → step 3 – Stop a single PLC application: continue with → step 4

3 Launch a single PLC application

► Press [Start] to launch the selected PLC application.

> The confirmation prompt appears.

► Press [OK] to confirm the prompt.

> The PLC application is started.

► Continue with → step 5

4 Stop a single PLC application

► Press [Stop] to stop the selected application.

> The confirmation prompt appears.

► Press [OK] to confirm the prompt.

> The application is stopped.

5 Display information about the PLC application

> The status display of the PLC application is updated

Page 63: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

63

>

Control PLC applications 41577

To control all PLC applications stored on the device:

1 Select the menu page

► > >

► Select [All applications] tab.

2 Display status information about the PLC applications

> Page shows the following information:

Designation Meaning

[Total] Number of applications stored on the device

[Started] Number of applications running

► Perform one of the following actions: – Launch all PLC applications: continue with → step 3 – Stop all PLC applications: continue with → step 4 – Reset all PLC applications: continue with → step 5

3 Launch all PLC applications

► Press [Starten] button.

> The confirmation prompt appears.

► Press [OK] to confirm the prompt.

> All PLC applications are started.

► Continue with → step 6

4 Stop all PLC applications

► Press [Stop] button.

> The confirmation prompt appears

► Press [OK] to confirm the prompt.

> All PLC applications are stopped.

► Continue with → step 6

5 Reset all PLC applications

► Press [Reset] button.

> The confirmation prompt appears.

► Press [OK] to confirm the prompt.

> All PLC applications are reset and stopped.

6 Display the status of the PLC applications

> The page shows updated information about the stored PLC applications.

> The status of the [Start], [Stop] and [Reset] buttons is updated.

Page 64: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

64

>

Show target visualisation 41662

Using the CODESYS programming system, the user can optionally program a target visualisation to create an application-specific user interface for the display of AC1421/22. The target visualisation is loaded onto the device together with the CODESYS project, but it must be activated manually.

If no valid target visualisation is stored on the device, a green screen appears after activating the [Activate Target-Visu] button

To exit the target visualisation and return to the menu page:

► Press [] and [] simultaneously.

If the device does not react when entering [] + [], the key combination is deactivated.

► Activate the key combination using the system command "Show target visualisation" (→ Device Manual Supplement, Command 0x0110 – Display target visualisation)!

To activate the target visualisation:

1 Select menu page

► > >

► Select the [Activate TargetVisu] tab.

2 Start the target visualisation

► Press [Activate Target-Visu] button.

> The confirmation message appears.

► Press [OK] button to confirm the message.

> The display shows the target visualisation.

Page 65: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

65

>

PLC: Diagnosis 41797

The [Diagnosis] menu item provides access to diagnostic data of the device-internal PLC. >

Show memory used 41663

To display information about the memory capacity currently used:

1 Select the menu page

► > >

► Select [Memory] tab.

2 Show memory used

> Page shows the following information:

Name Description

[CODESYS] Memory capacity occupied by CODESYS data (in Kbytes)

[free] Free memory (in Kbytes)

The current usage of memory space is read out once when calling up the menu page. These values are not refreshed while the menu page is displayed. Any changes regarding the memory capacity (e.g. through download of a new CODESYS project) will therefore not be reflected in the displayed values.

To update the displayed values:

► Quit the [Diagnosis] menu page.

► Access the [Diagnosis] menu page again.

> The menu page displays the current memory usage of device.

Page 66: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

66

>

5.5.2 System: Information 41672

The [Information] menu item provides access to the version information about the system components. >

Show version information 41661

To display information about the hardware and software components of the device:

1 Select the menu page

► >

► Select [Version] tab.

2 Show version information

> Page shows the following information:

Name Description Possible values

[Modell] Article number of the device e.g. AC1421/22

[SN] Serial number of the device e.g. 000000113034

[Build] Version number of the installed firmware e.g. 4.2.x

[HW version] Version number of the device main board e.g. AA

Page 67: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

67

>

5.5.3 System: Setup 41670

The [Setup] menu item provides access to the configuration options of the system. >

Set the output access 41645

To set the control instance for the outputs of the AS-i slaves:

1 Select the menu page

► >

► Select [System settings] tab.

2 Configure the control instance for the outputs of the AS-i slaves

► Set the following parameters as required:

Name Description Possible values

[Output access] Control instance of the AS-i slave outputs

[Gateway] A higher-level PLC controls the outputs of the AS-i slaves.

[Manual] The operator controls the outputs of the AS-i slaves via the graphical user interface.

[PLC] The device-internal PLC controls the outputs of the AS-i slaves.

3 Save the changes

► Press [Accept selection] to save the changes.

> The selected instance controls the outputs of the AS-i slaves.

If the value PLC is selected, the system will automatically enable the device-internal PLC (→ Enable/Disable the device-internal PLC (→ S. 68)).

Page 68: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

68

>

Enable/Disable the device-internal PLC 41496

NOTICE! When disabling the device-internal PLC, all running PLC applications will be stopped. This could have undesirable effects on the controlled process if the PLC figures as the control unit for the AS-i slave outputs.

Risk of material damage to the machine/plant!

► The PLC application should be terminated in a controlled manner before disabling the device-internal PLC! (→Control PLC applications (→ S. 63))

► Implement a safe state when programming the PLC applications!

When activating the device-internal PLC, PLC applications stored on the device are started automatically.

► Implement a safe start state when programming the PLC applications!

To set the internal Programmable Logic Controller (PLC):

1 Select the menu page

► >

► Select [System settings] tab.

2 Enable/Disable the device-internal PLC

> Set the following parameters as required:

Parameter Description Possible values

[Use PLC] State of the device-internal CODESYS PLC

Device-internal PLC is disabled.

Device-internal PLC is enabled.

> Selected value is applied.

Page 69: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

69

>

Set the device cycle 41649

NOTICE! A device cycle that is too short can have undesirable effects on the correct transmission of the process and control data between the PLC and peripheral devices (higher-level PLC, AS-i slaves).

> Risk of material damage to the machine/plant!

► Ensure a sufficiently long cycle time!

If the PLC is disabled, the device operates with a fixed cycle time of 0.7 ms.

To set the device cycle:

1 Select the menu page

► >

► Select [System settings] tab.

2 Set the device cycle

► Set the following parameters as required:

Parameter Description Possible values

[Device cycle] Active → device cycle [1.5 ms] 1.5 milliseconds

[2.0 ms] 2.0 milliseconds

[2.5 ms] 2.5 milliseconds

[3.0 ms] 3.0 milliseconds

3 Save the changes

► Press [Accept selection] button.

> Selected value is applied.

Page 70: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

70

>

Switch the menu language 41701

To select the language of the GUI texts:

1 Select the menu page

► >

► Select [System settings] tab.

2 Select the menu language

> The [Language] list shows the active language in which the GUI texts are displayed.

► Set the following parameters as required:

Parameter Description Possible values

[Language] Language in which the GUI texts are displayed

[Deutsch] German

[English] English

[Français] French

[Español] Spanish

[Italiano] Italian

[Português] Portuguese

3 Save the changes

► Press [Accept selection] button.

> GUI elements are displayed in the requested language. >

Optional: switch the language with a key combination 41731

The languages available on the device are saved in an ordered list:

German

English

French

Spanish

Italian

Portuguese

To switch the language with a key combination (from the active language):

► Press [] + [] to select the previous language in the list.

OR:

► Press [] + [] to select the next language in the list.

> GUI elements are displayed in the requested language.

The key combination allows you to change the language from any menu page.

Page 71: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

71

>

Set the behaviour of the display 41651

To set the display behaviour (screen saver, behaviour in case of inactivity):

1 Select the menu page

► >

► Select [System settings] tab.

2 Set the behaviour of the display

► Set the following parameters as required:

Parameter Description Possible values

[Screen saver] Status of the screen saver

Screen saver is inactive: Display remains permanently switched on.

Screen saver is active: Display is switched off after 10 minutes of inactivity.

[Return to start screen] Display behaviour in case of extended period of user inactivity

The currently selected menu page stays on the screen.

When the set time has elapsed, the display automatically changes to the start screen.

> Selected values are applied.

Page 72: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

72

>

Set the system time 41412

The system time consists of date and time. The device provides the following options for setting the system time:

Manual: The operator sets the date and time manually.

Via NTP server: The device has an NTP client. The system time can be synchronised with an NTP server.

Apply the system time of a PC/laptop:

The device adopts the system time of a PC/laptop (only available via the web interface of the device)

To set the system time:

1 Select the menu page

► >

► Select [Clock] tab.

2 Display the current system time settings

> The following parameters display the current system time settings:

Parameter Description Possible values

[Activate NTP] Activate the NTP client of the device

NTP client is deactivated: Device adopts the manually set values for [Time] and [Date].

NTP client is not active: From an NTP server, the device adopts the values for [Time] and [Date].

Status LED Status of NTP client and synchronisation with NTP server

[NTP not active ] NTP client is deactivated: Applicable are the manually set values for [Time] and [Date].

[NTP waiting ] NTP client is active: Device waits for messages from NTP server.

[NTP successful ] NTP client is active: Time synchronisation with NTP server was successful.

[Time] System time (format [hh:mm:ss])

e.g. 12:23:56

[Date] System date (format [yyyy-mm-dd])

e.g. 2014-04-23

3 Select the configuration method

► Select one of the following: – Set the system time manually (→ S. 73) – Synchronise the system time with an NTP server (→ S. 74) – Adopt the system time of the PC (→ S. 75)

Page 73: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

73

>

Set the system time manually 41411

To set the system time manually:

1 Select the menu page

► >

► Select [Clock] tab.

2 Deactivate the NTP client of the device

► Uncheck [Activate NTP] (→Set the system time (→ S. 72)).

► Press [Accept selection] button.

> The changes become effective.

> NTP status: [NTP not active ]

3 Set the system time manually

► Set [Time] and [Date] (Operating notes: →Numerical field (→ S. 30))

> Selected values are applied.

Seconds cannot be changed manually. When leaving the edit mode, the seconds will be automatically set to 0.

Page 74: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

74

>

Synchronise the system time with an NTP server 41424

To synchronise the system time with an NTP server:

To synchronise the system time and date via Network Time Protocol (NTP), connect the configuration interface of the device to an NTP server directly or over a network.

1 Select the menu page

► >

► Select [Clock] tab.

2 Deactivate the NTP client

► Uncheck [Activate NTP] (→Set the system time (→ S. 72)).

> The IP address field and the [NTP-Offset] list can be edited.

3 Set the IP address of the NTP server and NTP offset

► Set the following parameters as required:

Parameter Description Possible values

IP address field IP address of the NTP server e.g. 192.168.0.100

[NTP-Offset]

(optional)

Time zone of the NTP server in UTC (Universal Coordinated Time).

[no offset] System time is taken from NTP server without offset

[UTC -12:00 ... UTC +12:00]

Adopt time zones according to UTC division (displayed number of hours will be added/subtracted)

► Press [Accept selection] button.

► The device tries to synchronise the system time with the NTP server.

> NTP status: [NTP waiting ]

In case of a successful synchronisation:

> NTP status: [NTP successful ]

> [Time] and [Date] show the synchronised values.

In case of a failed synchronisation:

► Check the settings of the IP parameters of the configuration interface.

► Check the IP address of the NTP server.

► Repeat the process.

Page 75: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

75

>

Adopt the system time of the PC 41563

To adopt the date and time of a PC/laptop:

This function is only available via the web-interface of the device (→Remote access (→ S. 32)).

Requirements:

► Connect the device with PC/laptop (→ Configuration interface: connection concepts (→ S. 123)).

► Start the web browser and open the web interface of the device (→ Recommended browsers (→ S. 32)).

This function can only be executed via the web interface of the device.

1 Select the menu page

► >

► Select the [Clock] tab.

2 Adopt the system time of the PC/laptop

► Uncheck [Activate NTP] (→Set the system time (→ S. 72)).

► In group [Apply Time and Date from the PC]: Press [OK] button.

> The device applies the date and time of the PC/laptop.

> [Date] and [Time] display the system time.

Page 76: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

76

>

Clone device configuration 41593

This function is only available via the local user interface of the device!

The device makes it possible to create an image of the current device configuration, to transfer it to another device and activate it there (clone). The export and import of the configuration file takes place via an SD card.

A device configuration consists of the following settings:

System settings

AS-i 1/AS-i 2 settings

EtherNet/IP settings

PLC applications (incl. PLC task configuration, variables and data)

Cloning a device configuration is only possible if the following conditions are met.

The firmware versions of the source device and the target device are compatible (compatible = versions are identical in the major release and minor release, e.g. V3.2. is compatible with V3.2.2, but: V3.2.1 is incompatible with V3.3.1).

Source and target device have the same article number.

Page 77: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

77

>

Export device configuration 41515

NOTICE! During the export the control functions of the device are not available.

> Risk of undesired system behaviour

► Do not export the device configuration during operation of the plant!

NOTICE! An interruption of the export can lead to a faulty export file.

> Risk of data loss

► Do not disconnect the device during the export.

► Only start the export after the boot application has been successfully generated.

► Do not remove the SD card from the device before the export is completed.

The SD card has to be formatted with the FAT32 file system. SD cards with other file systems are not recognised by the AC1421/22.

To allow identification of the saved configuration the export file is saved using the following name convention:

ifm_DevID_xxxxxxxxxxxx_YYYYMMDDhhmmss.iconf

DevID Article number of the device

xxxxxxxxxxxx Serial number of the device

YYYYMMDDhhmmss Timestamp of the saved file (YYYY = year, MM = month, DD = day, hh = hours, mm = minutes, ss = seconds)

To save the current device configuration on an SD card:

1 Select menu page

► >

> Select [Configuration] tab.

2 Save the device configuration

► Insert an empty, formatted SD card in the SD card slot of the device.

► Activate the [Export configuration] button.

> The device saves the current configuration on the SD card. The device stores the current configuration on the SD card.

Page 78: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

78

>

Import device configuration 41489

NOTICE! During the import the control functions of the device are not available. During the import the device reboots.

> Risk of undesired system behaviour

► Do not import the device configuration during operation of the plant!

NOTICE! An interruption of the import can lead to a faulty device configuration.

> Risk of data loss

► Do not disconnect the device during the import.

► Do not remove the SD card from the device before the import is completed.

To avoid that a wrong device configuration is restored:

► Check before the import if the required device configuration is saved on the SD card (identification of the saved device configuration: → Export device configuration (→ S. 77)).

► Save only the device configuration to be imported in the root directory of the SD card.

To transfer a stored device configuration to the device:

1 Reboot the device

► Insert the SD card containing the stored device configuration into the SD card slot.

► Disconnect and the device from the power supply and reconnect it to the power supply.

> Device reboots.

2 Select menu page

► >

► Select [Configuration] tab.

3 Restore the device configuration

► Activate the [Import configuration] button.

> A warning appears.

► Confirm prompt with [OK].

> The device configuration is loaded and saved onto the device.

> The device reboots.

Page 79: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

79

>

System reset 41704

To reset the device:

1 Select the menu page

► >

► Select [Reset] tab.

2 Carry out a system reset

► Press [Restart] button.

> A safety query is displayed..

► Press [OK] to confirm the security prompt.

> The device reboots. >

Store diagnostic protocol 41710

Using the diagnostic protocol, the user can archive the current device configuration or provide all relevant information to the service staff via the device settings.

The diagnostic protocol contains the following information in the selected user language:

AS-i configuration

EtherNet/IP configuration

System settings

CODESYS information

OSC history

This function is only available via the web-interface of the device (→Remote access (→ S. 32)).

Requirements:

► Connect the device with PC/laptop (→ Configuration interface: connection concepts (→ S. 123)).

► Start the web browser and open the web interface of the device (→ Recommended browsers (→ S. 32)).

1 Select menu page

► >

► Select the [Diagnostic protocol] tab.

2 Store diagnostic protocol

► Press the [Generate diagnostic protocol] button.

> AC1421/22 generates diagnostic protocol.

> The progress bar indicates the status of the process.

> A dialogue window appears.

► Select file name and memory location and press [OK] to confirm.

> The diagnostic protocol is stored as an HTML file at the selected location.

Page 80: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

80

>

5.5.4 System: Diagnosis 9053:

The [Diagnosis] menu item provides access to the diagnostic data of the device. >

Display diagnostic data 41435

To display the diagnostic data of the device:

1 Select menu page

► >

2 Display diagnostic data

> Page shows the following information:

Name Description Possible values

[Betriebszeit [JJ-TTT SS:MM]]

Operating time of system and components

All times indicated in [JJ-TTT-SS-MM] format:

YY = years DD = days hh = hours mm = minutes

[gesamt] Operating time of device

[aktuell] Operating time of device since last system start

[LCD] Operating time of LCD

[PLC] Operating time of controller

[Temperatur] Current device temperature Indications in [°C] (→ Note)

[Versorgt durch] Voltage supply of device [Aux] Voltage is supplied separately by AS-i network and AUX 24 V.

[AS-i] Voltage is only supplied by the AS-i network.

[Power Modul] Voltage is supplied by data decoupling module.

The temperature monitoring continuously checks the system temperature of the device. The following temperature ranges apply:

Normal range: < 79.9 °C

Limit range: 80 °C ... 84.9 °C

Critical range: >= 85 °C

If the system temperature reaches the critical zone, a warning is displayed in the → Online Support Center (OSC) (→ S. 116). The warning only disappears when the device temperature is again in the normal range.

Page 81: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

81

>

5.6 Interfaces 41482

The [Interfaces] menu provides access to the configuration options of the device's interfaces.

Navigation path Functions

>

Configuration interface → Configure the IP parameters manually (→ S. 83) → Configure the IP parameters automatically (→ S. 84) → Show Ethernet information (→ S. 84)

>

EtherNet/IP interface → Interfaces: EtherNet/IP interface (→ S. 85)

Page 82: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

82

>

5.6.1 Interfaces: Configuration interface 41481

The [Configuration interface] menu provides access to the settings of the Ethernet Configuration interface (port X3). >

Notes on IP settings 41751

The device provides the following options for configuration of the Ethernet Configuration interface:

Manual = The operator sets the interface parameters (IP address, network mask, gateway address) manually.

Automatic = The interface parameters are set automatically. The operator can choose between these protocols:

– Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) – Zero Configuration Networking (Zeroconf)

To display the current configuration method and the active IP parameters of the configuration interface:

1 Select the menu page

► >

► Select [IP setup] tab.

2 Show the active settings

> The parameters below show the active settings:

Parameter Meaning Possible values

[Optain IP address autom.]

Active method for the configuration of the interface parameters

Manual assignment of interface parameters through operator

Automatic assignment of interface parameters

[IP status] Configuration protocol used [Static] The operator sets the IP parameters manually.

[DHCP] The IP parameters are set by a DHCP server.

[Zeroconf] The IP parameters are set automatically with the Zeroconf protocol.

[IP address] IP address of the interface e.g. 192.168.0.100

[Subnet mask] Network mask of the network segment

e.g. 255.255.255.0

[Gateway address] IP address of the network gateway

e.g. 192.168.0.1

► Select one of the following options: – Configure the IP parameters manually (→ S. 83) – Configure the IP parameters automatically (→ S. 84)

Page 83: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

83

>

Configure the IP parameters manually 41608

To configure the IP parameters of the configuration interface manually:

1 Select the menu page

► >

► Select [IP setup] tab.

2 Deactivate the NTP client

► Uncheck [Obtain IP address autom.] (→Notes on IP settings (→ S. 82)).

> The IP address fields [IP address], [Subnet mask] and [Gateway address] can be edited.

3 Configure the IP parameters

► Configure the following parameters as required (→Notes on IP settings (→ S. 82)): – [IP address] – [Subnet mask] – [Gateway address]

4 Save the changes

► Press [Accept] button.

> Selected values are applied.

> [IP status] displays the active configuration method: [Static]

Page 84: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

84

>

Configure the IP parameters automatically 41604

The device must be connected to a DHCP server to automatically receive the interface parameters via DHCP.

► Connect the configuration interface (X3) to a DHCP server.

To configure the IP parameters of the configuration interface automatically:

1 Select the menu page

► >

► Select [IP setup] tab.

2 Enable the NTP client

► Activate the [Obtain IP address autom.] (→Notes on IP settings (→ S. 82))

3 Save the changes

► Press [Accept] button.

> The device tries to obtain the IP parameters from a DHCP server.

> If the configuration of IP parameters via DHCP server fails, the device will generate the IP parameters with the Zeroconf protocol.

> [IP address], [Subnet mask] and [Gateway address] display the set IP parameters.

> Selected values are applied.

> [IP status] displays the active configuration method: DHCP or Zeroconf.

The automatic configuration of the IP parameters takes approx. 10 seconds.

>

Show Ethernet information 41660

To show Ethernet information regarding the configuration interface:

1 Select the menu page

► >

► Select [Ethernet information] tab.

2 Show Ethernet information

> Page shows the following information:

Name Description

[MAC ID] MAC identification number of the interface

Page 85: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

85

>

5.6.2 Interfaces: EtherNet/IP interface 41485

The [EtherNet/IP] menu provides access to information, settings and diagnostic data of the EtherNet/IP interface.

Navigation path Functions

> >

EtherNet/IP information →Show information (→ S. 86) →Display EtherNet/IP data →Display the module configuration (→ S. 88) →Download the device and I/O description (→ S. 88)

> >

EtherNet/IP settings →Configure the IP parameters manually (→ S. 90) →Configure the IP parameters automatically (→ S. 90) →Set the configuration mode (→ S. 91) →Set the device-specific parameters (→ S. 92) →Set the EtherNet/IP module configuration (→ S. 94)

> >

EtherNet/IP diagnosis →Display diagnostic data (→ S. 96)

Page 86: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

86

>

EtherNet/IP: Information 41553

The menu item [Information] provides access to information regarding the EtherNet/IP interface. >

Show information 41659

To display information about the EtherNet/IP interface:

1 Select the menu page

► > >

► Select [Information] tab.

2 Show information about the EtherNet/IP interface

> Page shows the following information:

Designation Description

[Manufacturer ID] Displays the manufacturer ID

[Unit type] Displays the device type

[Product code] Displays the product code

[Revicion no.] Displays the revision number

[SN] Displays the serial number

[Product name] Displays the product name

Page 87: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

87

>

Display EtherNet/IP data 41459

To display the EtherNet/IP data:

1 Select the menu page

► > >

► Select [Data] tab.

2 Display EtherNet/IP data

> Page shows the following information:

Designation Meaning Possible values

[MAC-ID] MAC ID of the EtherNet/IP interface e.g. 00:02:01:01:27:CF

[RPI Zeit] RPI time in milliseconds [ms] (RPI = Requested Packet Interval)

[Analog. channels/I-slave] Number of analogue channels per input slave

→ Set the device-specific parameters (→ S. 92)

[Analog. channels/O-slave]

Number of analogue channels per output slave

→ Set the device-specific parameters (→ S. 92)

[Failsafe state] Behaviour of the AS-i outputs in case of an interrupted EtherNet/IP connection

→ Set the device-specific parameters (→ S. 92)

[Parameter download] The AS-i slave parameters are transferred when a EtherNet/IP connection is established.

Parameter can only be configured via the projection software!

Parameters are not downloaded, i.e. the AS-i slaves are activated using the parameters that are set in the device.

Each time a EtherNet/IP connection is established, the AS-i slave parameters are loaded from the EtherNet/IP controller to the device, activated in the slaves and stored non-volatilely.

[Change byte order] Byte order in a data word

The set parameter value applies to all attached tables.

→ Set the device-specific parameters (→ S. 92)

Page 88: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

88

>

Display the module configuration 41436

To display the current module configuration:

1 Select the menu page

► > > .

► Select [Module configuration] tab.

2 Display the module configuration

> The page shows the active configuration of the EtherNet/IP slots (→ Overview: EtherNet/IP modules (→ S. 163)).

>

Download the device and I/O description 41500

This function is only available via the web-interface of the device (→Remote access (→ S. 32)).

Requirements:

► Connect the device with PC/laptop (→ Configuration interface: connection concepts (→ S. 123)).

► Start the web browser and open the web interface of the device (→ Recommended browsers (→ S. 32)).

1 Select the menu page

► > >

► Select [File download] tab.

> The [File download] menu screen appears.

2 Download the EDS file and the description of the inputs and outputs.

► Click the link [Download EDS-Datei] to download the device description.

► Click the [Download I/O Description file] button.

> The web server creates a description file of the inputs and outputs.

► Save the created file.

Page 89: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

89

>

EtherNet/IP: Setup 41552

The [Setup] menu item provides access to the configuration options of the EtherNet/IP interface. >

Notes on IP settings 41752

The device provides the following options for configuration of the EtherNet/IP interface:

Manual = The operator sets the interface parameters (IP address, network mask, gateway address) manually.

Automatic = The interface parameters are automatically set through one of the following protocols.

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)

Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP)

To display the current configuration method for IP parameters of the EtherNet/IP interface:

1 Select the menu page

► > >

► Select [Fieldbus] tab.

2 Display the current configuration method for IP parameters

> The [IP mode] list shows the active configuration method:

[Static] = The operator sets the IP parameters manually.

[DHCP] = The device receives the IP parameters from a DHCP server.

[BOOTP] = The device receives the IP parameters from a BOOTP server.

3 Display the current IP parameters of the EtherNet/IP interface

> The following parameters show the current IP settings of the EtherNet/IP interface:

Designation Description

[IP address] IP address of the configuration interface

[Subnet mask] Subnet mask of the network segment

[Gateway address] IP address of the EtherNet gateway

Page 90: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

90

>

Configure the IP parameters manually 41607

To manually configure the IP parameters of the EtherNet/IP interface:

1 Select the menu page

► > >

► Select [Fieldbus] tab.

2 Activate the manual configuration

► From the list [IP mode], select the value Static (→ Notes on IP settings (→ S. 89)).

> The IP address fields [IP address], [Subnet mask] and [Gateway address] can be edited.

3 Set the IP parameters of the EtherNet/IP interface

► Set the following parameters as required: – [IP address] – [Subnet mask] – [Gateway address]

4 Save the changes

► Press [Accept] button.

> Selected values are applied. >

Configure the IP parameters automatically 41603

In order to obtain the interface parameters automatically via DHCP or BOOTP, the device must be connected to a DHCP or BOOTP server.

► Connect the EtherNet/IP interfaces (X6/X7) to a DHCP/BOOTP server.

1 Select the menu page

► > >

► Select [Fieldbus] tab.

2 Select the configuration method

► From the list [IP mode], select either DHCP or BOOTP.

3 Save the changes

► Press [Accept] button.

> The device receives the IP parameters from a DHCP or BOOTP server.

> Selected value is applied.

> [IP address], [Subnet mask] and [Gateway address] show the current values.

Page 91: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

91

>

Set the configuration mode 41650

More information:→ Configuration mode (→ S. 195)

To set the configuration mode of the device:

1 Select the menu page

► > >

► Select [Fieldbus] tab.

2 Select the configuration method for the EtherNet/IP parameters

> Set the following parameter as required:

Parameter Description Possible values

[Configuration mode] Active configuration mode of the device

[Top-Down] The device-specific parameters and the module configuration are set via the projection software of the EtherNet/IP controller.

[Independent] The parameters of the EtherNet/IP interface are set via the graphical user interface of the device.

3 Save the changes

> Press [Accept] button.

> Selected value is applied.

Page 92: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

92

>

Set the device-specific parameters 41642

The parameters can only be changed if the configuration mode is set to Independent (→ Set the configuration mode (→ S. 91)).

To set the device-specific parameters: set the number of channels to be transmitted per analogue input slave:

1 Select the menu page

► > >

► Select [Parameter] tab.

2 Set the number of analogue channels per input slave

► Set the following parameter as required:

Parameter Description Possible values

[Analog. channels/I-slave] Number of analogue channels transmitted per input slave

[1 channel per A/B] 1 channel per A/B slave OR: channels 1 + 3 per single slave

[1 channel] 1 channel per single slave OR: 1 channel per A slave

[2 channels] 2 channels per single slave OR: 2 channels per A slave

[4 channels] 4 channels per single slave OR: 2 channels per A/B slave

3 Set the number of analogue channels per output slave

► Set the following parameter as required:

Parameter Description Possible values

[Analog. channels/O-slave] Number of analogue channels transmitted per output slave

[1 channel per A/B] 1 channel per A/B slave OR: channels 1 + 3 per single slave

[1 channel] 1 channel per single slave OR: 1 channel per A slave

[2 channels] 2 channels per single slave OR: 2 channels per A slave

[4 channels] 4 channels per single slave OR: 2 channels per A/B slave

4 Set the failsafe state

► Set the following parameter as required:

Parameter Description Possible values

[Failsafe state] Behaviour of the slave outputs in case of an interrupted EtherNet/IP connection

[Hold outputs] The outputs hold the values which were present immediately before the connection was interrupted.

[Output reset] The outputs are reset to their initial values.

Page 93: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

93

5 Set the byte order of a word

► Set the following parameter as required:

Parameter Description Possible values

[Change byte order] Byte order in a data word Byte order remains unchanged.

Byte order is inverted.

6 Save the changes

► Press [Accept] button.

> Selected values are applied.

Page 94: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

94

>

Set the EtherNet/IP module configuration 41646

NOTICE! For the transmission of cyclic process data between the device and the EtherNet/IP PLC, a limited number of data words is available for each direction of transmission:

Input data (= modules 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 10, 13, 14): 248 words

Output data (= modules 2, 4, 6, 8, 11, 12, 15): 248 words

If the EtherNet/IP modules have been parameterised in such a way that the cyclic input and output data comprise more than 248 words per direction of transmission, any data from the 249th word will not be transmitted and will therefore be lost.

> Risk of data loss.

► Parameterise the EtherNet/IP modules in a way to ensure that the input and output data do not exceed the maximum number of words to be transmitted.

The EtherNet/IP modules can only be configured on the device if the configuration mode is set to Independent (→ Set the configuration mode (→ S. 91)).

To define which cyclic process data are to be transmitted in the EtherNet/IP slots:

1 Select the menu page

► > >

► Select [Module configuration] tab.

2 Set the EtherNet/IP slots for the digital inputs and outputs of the AS-i slaves

> Set the following parameters as required:

Parameter Description Possible values

[EtherNet/IP: Slot 1] Digital inputs of the S/A slaves connected to AS-i master 1

→ Slot 1 – Digital input data single or A slaves, AS-i master 1 (→ S. 164)

[EtherNet/IP: Slot 2] Digital outputs of the S/A slaves connected to AS-i master 1

→ Slot 2 – Digital output data single or A slaves, AS-i master 1 (→ S. 164)

[EtherNet/IP: Slot 3] Digital inputs of the S/A slaves connected to AS-i master 2 (only devices with 2 AS-i masters)

→ Slot 3 – Digital input data single or A slaves, AS-i master 2 (→ S. 165)

[EtherNet/IP: Slot 4] Digital outputs of the S/A slaves connected to AS-i master 2 (only devices with 2 AS-i masters)

→ Slot 4 – Digital output data single or A slaves, AS-i master 2 (→ S. 165)

[EtherNet/IP: Slot 5] Digital inputs of the B slaves connected to AS-i master 1

→ Slot 5 – Digital input data B slaves, AS-i master 1 (→ S. 166)

[EtherNet/IP: Slot 6] Digital outputs of the B slaves connected to AS-i master 1

→ Slot 6 – Digital output data B slaves, AS-i master 1 (→ S. 166)

[EtherNet/IP: Slot 7] Digital inputs of the B slaves connected to AS-i master 2 (only devices with 2 AS-i masters)

→ Slot 7 – Digital input data B slaves, AS-i master 2 (→ S. 167)

[EtherNet/IP: Slot 8] Digital outputs of the B slaves connected to AS-i master 2 (only devices with 2 AS-i masters)

→ Slot 8 – Digital output data B slaves, AS-i master 2 (→ S. 167)

Page 95: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

95

3 Set the EtherNet/IP slots for the analogue inputs and outputs of the AS-i slaves

► Set the following parameters as required:

Parameter Description Possible values

[EtherNet/IP: Slot 9] Analogue inputs, area 1 → Slot 9 – Analogue input data (→ S. 170)

[EtherNet/IP: Slot 10] Analogue inputs, area 2 → Slot 10 – Analogue input data (→ S. 171)

[EtherNet/IP: Slot 11] Analogue outputs, area 1 → Slot 11 – Analogue output data (→ S. 172)

[EtherNet/IP: Slot 12] Analogue outputs, area 2 → Slot 12 – Analogue output data (→ S. 173)

What data is transmitted in each word depends on the set values of the parameters [Analog. channels/I-Slave] and [Analog. channels/O-Slave]. → Set the device-specific parameters (→ S. 92)

4 Configure the EtherNet/IP slot for diagnostic data

► Set the following parameters as required:

Parameter Description Possible values

[EtherNet/IP: Slot 13] Diagnostic data transmitted to the fieldbus controller

→ Slot 13 – Diagnostic data (→ S. 178)

5 Set the EtherNet/IP slots for the data between the EtherNet/IP controller and the device-internal PLC

► Set the following parameters as required:

Parameter Description Possible values

[EtherNet/IP: Slot 14] Scope of data transferred from the device-internal PLC to the EtherNet/IP controller.

→ Slot 14 – Inputs from PLC (→ S. 184)

[EtherNet/IP: Slot 15] Scope of data transferred from the EtherNet/IP controller to the device-internal PLC.

→ Slot 15 – Outputs to PLC (→ S. 185)

6 Save the changes

► Press [Accept] button.

> Selected values are applied.

Page 96: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

96

>

EtherNet/IP: Diagnosis 41554

The menu item [Diagnosis] provides access to the diagnostic data of the EtherNet/IP interface: >

Display diagnostic data 41433

To display the diagnostic data of the EtherNet/IP interfaces:

1 Select the menu page

► > >

2 Display diagnostic data

> Page shows the following information:

Name Description Possible values

[EtherNet/IP conection status] Displays the connection status of the EtherNet/IP interfaces

[Status port X6] Connection status port X6 No connection to fieldbus controller

Connection to fieldbus controller established

[Status port X7] Connection status port X7 No connection to fieldbus controller

Connection to fieldbus controller established

Page 97: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

97

>

5.7 ifm system solutions 41480

This menu is only available via the web interface of AC1421/22. → Remote access (→ S. 32)

The [ifm system solutions] menu provides access to information and installation options for ifm system solutions.

Navigation path Functions

ifm system solutions: → Show information about installed ifm apps (→ S. 99) → Install single/basic app (→ S. 100) → Install multi app (→ S. 101) → Update ifm apps (→ S. 102) → Uninstall ifm apps (→ S. 102)

Page 98: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

98

>

5.7.1 Notes on ifm system solutions 41753

With the AC1421/22, ifm electronic offers different system solutions for the simple implementation of typical applications. System solutions consist of applications which are processed by the device-internal CODESYS PLC.

ifm system solutions and user-created Anwendungs must not be stored and run simultaneously on the AC1421/22!

► Delete all CODESYS system solutions stored on the device before installing new ifm system solutions or user applications!

ifm system solutions can only be installed and run if the device-internal PLC is activated.

► Activate the PLC of the AC1421/22 (→Enable/Disable the device-internal PLC (→ S. 68))!

Users can download the available ifm system solutions from ifm's website.

>

Types of ifm system solutions 41684

There are 2 types of ifm system solutions:

Single apps Single apps provide the user with a CODESYS-based solution. Single apps directly access the I/O mechanisms of the CODESYS PLC. Only one single app must be stored and executed on the device.

Basic app + multi apps Multi apps provide the user with the possibility to execute different CODESYS-based solutions in parallel. The multi apps use the services of the basic app in order to be able to access the inputs and outputs of AC1421/22 at the same time. They operate as a pure communication layer between the I/O mechanisms of the CODESYS PLC and the connected multi apps. Maximum 5 multi apps at a time can be stored and executed in parallel on the device.

Page 99: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

99

>

5.7.2 Show information about installed ifm apps 41658

In order to display information about the ifm system solutions installed on the device:

1 Select menu page

► Select the [Information] tab.

2 Show information about installed ifm apps

> The browser window displays an overview of the installed ifm apps. The following information is displayed for each ifm app:

Information Meaning

[Name] Designation of the ifm system solution app

[Version] Version number of the ifm system solution app

[Type] Type of ifm app (single, basic, multi)

[Description] Description of the functionality of the ifm system solution app

[Licence information] Licence information about the ifm system solution in the selected user language

[Link to the ifm system solution app] Hyperlink for web visualisation of the ifm system solution app

Page 100: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

100

>

5.7.3 Install single/basic app 41487

Only one single app, basic app or CODESYS PLC application must be stored on the device.

When installing a single/basic app, all ifm system solutions and CODESYS PLC applications stored on the device are deleted.

To install a single or basic app on the device:

1 Select menu page

► Select the [Installation] tab.

2 Select single/basic app

► Activate the [Search] button.

> A dialogue window appears.

► Select the requested single/basic app (*.ifmapp) and click [Open] to load it.

> The file name of the selected single/basic app is displayed.

3 Transfer the single/basic app to the device

► Click on [Transfer file] button to transfer the selected single/basic app to the device.

> The progress bar indicates the status of the process.

> After successful transfer: The window shows information about the copied single/basic app.

► Optional: Click on [Cancel] to stop the download process.

4 Install the single/basic app

► Activate the [Start installation] button.

> CODESYS PLC is stopped.

> All ifm system solutions and CODESYS PLC applications on the device are deleted.

> The selected single/basic app is installed.

> The progress bar indicates the status of the installation process.

> CODESYS PLC is started.

> The installed single/basic app is automatically started (RUN state).

Page 101: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

101

>

5.7.4 Install multi app 41488

Maximum 5 multi apps must be stored on the device simultaneously.

To install a multi app on the device:

Requirements:

> The basic app is installed and started (RUN state) (→ Install single/basic app (→ S. 100))

1 Select menu page

► Select the [Installation] tab.

2 Select multi app

► Activate the [Search] button.

> A dialogue window appears.

► Select the requested multi app (*.ifmapp) and click the [Open] button to load it.

> The file name of the selected multi app is displayed.

3 Transfer the multi app onto the device

► Click on [Transfer file] to transfer the selected multi app onto the device.

> The progress bar indicates the status of the process.

> After successful transfer: The window shows information about the copied multi app.

► Optional: Click on [Cancel] to stop the download process.

4 Install multi app

► Activate the [Start installation] button.

> CODESYS PLC is stopped.

> The selected multi app is installed.

> The progress bar indicates the status of the installation process.

> CODESYS PLC is started.

> The installed multi app is automatically started (RUN state).

► Optional: Repeat steps 2 to 4 to install further multi apps.

Page 102: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

102

>

5.7.5 Update ifm apps 41682

The user can update an ifm system solution installed on the device by overwriting it with the new version of the ifm system solution.

Naming convention for ifm apps:

AppName_x.y.z.ifmapp

AppName = x.y.z = ifmapp =

name of the ifm app version number of the ifm app file extension of an ifm app

To update an ifm system solution:

Requirements:

> The name of the new ifm app and the installed ifm app must be identical.

> The version number of the ifm app must be greater than that of the installed ifm app.

To determine the version of the installed ifm app: → Show information about installed ifm apps (→ S. 99)

1 Download new ifm app

► Download new version of the ifm system solution (→ Notes on ifm system solutions (→ S. 98)).

2 Update the installed ifm app

► Install the new ifm system solution – Single/basic app: → Install single/basic app (→ S. 100) – multi app: → Install multi app (→ S. 101)

>

5.7.6 Uninstall ifm apps 41683

When a basic app is uninstalled, all dependent multi apps are uninstalled, too.

Before uninstalling an ifm app, the CODESYS PLC of AC1421/22 is stopped. After successful uninstallation, the CODESYS PLC is started again.

To uninstall an ifm system solution installed on the device:

1 Display installed ifm apps

► Show information about installed ifm apps (→ S. 99)

2 Uninstall ifm app

► In the section of the respective ifm app: Activate the [Uninstall app] button.

> CODESYS PLC is stopped.

> The selected ifm app is uninstalled.

> CODESYS PLC is started.

Page 103: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

103

>

Page 104: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

104

6 Setup Content

Connect the device to the periphery .....................................................................................................104 Start screen 'Basic settings' ..................................................................................................................105 Update the firmware of the device ........................................................................................................107 Connect and address AS-i slaves ........................................................................................................111 Setup of EtherNet/IP .............................................................................................................................111 Setup of the configuration interface ....................................................................................................112 Exchange AS-i slave ............................................................................................................................112

41644

This section provides information for setting up the device following mounting, electrical installation and connection to AS-i network components.

Observe the notes on mounting and electrical connection of the device!

→ Operating instructions (supplied with the device)

>

6.1 Connect the device to the periphery 41574

>

6.1.1 EtherNet/IP interface 41494

To connect the device to a EtherNet/IP network:

► Integrate the device into the EtherNet/IP network via the X6 and/or X7 EtherNet ports according to the requested topology. Details → Interfaces (→ S. 13)

>

6.1.2 Configuration interface 41595

To access the device via the configuration interface (e.g. web interface, programming interface of the device-internal PLC):

► Select one of the connection concepts to connect the configuration interface (X3) to the programming PC/laptop. Details: → Configuration interface: connection concepts (→ S. 123)

Page 105: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

105

>

6.2 Start screen 'Basic settings' 41689

The 'Basic settings' start screen appears after the following actions/events:

initial setup

firmware update

data loss due to battery failure

The basic settings provide access to the GUI texts, system time, etc.

The same operating notes as for the page view apply for the 'Basic settings' start screen (→ Page view (→ S. 19)).

>

6.2.1 Change the basic settings of the device 41597

To change the basic settings of the device:

1 Start the device

► Connect the device to a circuit.

> The device starts.

> The display shows the start screen "Basic settings" (screenshot).

2 Set the language of the GUI texts

► List shows the active language.

► Use [] / [] to mark the list.

> The focus (= orange frame) is on the marked list.

► Open the list with the left function key [Select].

► Use [] / [] to mark the desired language and press [Select] to activate it.

> The GUI texts appear in the selected language.

► Go to the next page with [Next].

Page 106: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

106

3 Set the system time

Option 1: Set the system time manually

► [Uhrzeit] and [Datum] indicate the current system time.

► Deactivate the checkbox [NT aktivieren].

> Status LED =

► In the group [Uhrzeit], set the desired clock time one position at a time.

► In the group [Datum], set the desired date one position at a time.

► Save the changes with [Finish] and go to the standard start screen.

Option 2. Synchronise the system time with an NTP server

► Activate the checkbox [NTP aktivieren].

> Status LED =

► Enter the IP address of the NTP server in the IP address field.

► Pick the time zone of the NTP server from the list (UTC format).

> The NTP client of the device synchronises the system time with the selected NTP server.

► Wait until status LED =

> [Datum] and [Uhrzeit] show the synchronised values.

► Save the changes with [Finish] and go to the standard start screen.

Page 107: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

107

>

6.3 Update the firmware of the device 41685

NOTICE! Interrupting a firmware update leads to a loss of the current system and fieldbus settings.

> Risk of data loss!

► Secure the device settings before carrying out a firmware update! (→ Export device configuration (→ S. 77))

► Ensure an uninterrupted voltage supply during the firmware update!

To update the firmware of the device:

► Select one of the following options:

Firmware update from SD card (→ S. 108)

Firmware update via the web interface (→ S. 109) >

6.3.1 Behaviour of the settings upon firmware update 41532

The following settings/data records remain valid upon a firmware update:

Setting / data record Path to the menu page

User language of the GUI [System] > [Setup] > [System settings]

Display settings (screen saver, return) [System] > [Setup] > [System settings]

System time (date/time) [System] > [Setup] > [Clock]

NTP settings [System] > [Setup] > [Clock]

Operating hours counter [System] > [Diagnosis]

AS-i master settings and configuration data [AS-i 1] / [AS-i 2] > [Master setup]

IP parameters of the configuration interface [Interfaces] > [Configuration interface] > [IP-Setup]

Fieldbus settings [Interfaces] > [EtherNet/IP] > [Setup]

The following settings/data records are reinitalised with their default values upon firmware update:

Setting / data record Reset value Path to the menu page

Control of the outputs Gateway [System] > [Setup] > [System settings]

Activate CODESYS PLC deactivated [System] > [Setup] > [System settings]

Device cycle 0.7 ms [System] > [Setup] > [System settings]

OSC Delete system messages Start page > [OSC]

Retain variables 0x00 --

Page 108: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

108

>

6.3.2 Firmware update from SD card 41511

Pay attention to notes on memory behaviour (→ Behaviour of the settings upon firmware update (→ S. 107))!

>

1 Preparations

► Download the new firmware file from the ifm website.

► Copy the firmware file into the root directory of an SD card.

► Insert the SD card containing the firmware file in the SD card slot (→SD card slot (→ S. 13)). >

2 Start the recovery mode

► Separate the device from the circuit.

► Perform the following actions simultaneously:

Press the left function key and the arrow keys [] and [] simultaneously and keep them pressed (→ picture).

Connect the device to a circuit.

► Keep the keys pressed until the screen [ifm Recovery] appears (approx. 10 s).

>

3 Update the firmware

► Use the arrow keys [] / [] to select the menu item [Install from SD] (→ picture).

► Press [OK] using the left function key.

> The updating process starts.

> The display shows the progress of the firmware update.

> A status message appears once the firmware has been updated successfully.

>

4 Reboot the device

► Use the arrow keys [] / [] to select the [Reboot] button.

► Press [OK] to reboot the device.

> The device reboots with the current firmware.

> The start screen "Basic settings" appears (→ Start screen 'Basic settings' (→ S. 105)).

Page 109: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

109

>

6.3.3 Firmware update via the web interface 41510

Pay attention to notes on memory behaviour (→ Behaviour of the settings upon firmware update (→ S. 107))!

>

1 Preparations

► Download the new firmware file from the ifm website.

► Connect the PC/laptop to the configuration interface (X3) of the device. (→ Configuration interface: connection concepts (→ S. 123))

>

2 Start the recovery mode

► Separate the device from the circuit.

► Perform the following actions simultaneously:

Press the left function key and the arrow keys [] and [] simultaneously and keep them pressed (→ picture).

Connect the device to a circuit.

► Keep the keys pressed until the screen [ifm Recovery] appears (approx. 10 s).

>

3 Optional: adjust the IP parameters

► Use the arrow keys [] / [] to select the menu item [Network Setup].

► Press [OK] to go to the network setup.

> The display shows the page [Network Setup] (→ picture).

> The page shows the current IP address of the device.

Option 1: obtain the IP parameters from a DHCP server

► Connect the configuration interface to the DHCP server.

► Use the arrow keys [] / [] to select the menu item [DHCP].

► Press [OK] to activate the DHCP client of the device.

> The device obtains the IP parameters from the DHCP server.

> If not successful, the device will create the IP parameters by means of the Zeroconf protocol.

> The display shows the [Network Setup] page with the new IP address.

► Leave the network setup with [Back].

> The display shows the [ifm Recovery] page.

Page 110: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

110

Option 2: configure the IP parameters manually

► Use the arrow keys [] / [] to select the menu item [Manual Setup].

► Activate the manual setup with [OK].

> The display shows the [Static IP setup] page (→ picture)

► Use the arrow keys [] / [] to select the following menu items one after the other and set them as required: – [IP Address] – [Network Mask] – [Default gateway]

► Press [Apply] to save the set values.

> The display shows the [Network Setup] page with the new IP address.

► Leave the network setup with [Back].

> The display shows the [ifm Recovery] page.

>

4 Update the firmware

► Access the web interface of the device.

> The web interface of the recovery mode appears:

► Press the [Search ...] button.

> The file explorer appears.

► Select the firmware file and press [Open].

> The field [Select image to upload] shows the file path and name of the firmware file.

► Press [send] to start the updating process.

> The display and web interface show the progress of the firmware update.

> A status message appears once the firmware has been updated successfully. >

5 Reboot the device

► Click on the tab [Reboot]

> The device reboots with the current firmware.

> The start screen "Basic settings" appears (→ Start screen 'Basic settings' (→ S. 105)). >

Page 111: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

111

6.4 Connect and address AS-i slaves 41575

To integrate AS-i slaves into an AS-i network that is controlled by one of the AS-i masters of the device:

1 Connect and address the AS-i slave

► Connect ONE AS-i slave to be addressed to the requested AS-i network (AS-i 1 or AS-i 2) as described in the corresponding installation instructions.

► Assign the desired address to the AS-i slave (→ Quick setup: Address the AS-i slaves connected to AS-i Master 1 (→ S. 46) or → Quick setup: Address the AS-i slaves connected to AS-i Master 2 (→ S. 47)).

► Optional: Repeat step 1 to connect and address further AS-i slaves.

2 Project the AS-i network

► Carry out a projection adaptation on the AS-i master with the newly addressed AS-i slaves (→ Quick setup: Project AS-i networks (→ S. 39)).

> The AS-i master adds the detected slaves (LDS) to the list of the projected slaves (LPS).

> The AS-i slaves have a valid address and are integrated in the AS-i network. >

6.5 Setup of EtherNet/IP 41407

Detailed information on how to configure the EtherNet/IP network: → operating instructions of the EtherNet/IP master

To connect the device to the EtherNet/IP network:

► Select one of the following options:

Use the top-down configuration mode:→ Configuration mode: Top-Down (→ S. 196)

Use the independent configuration mode: → Configuration mode: Independent (→ S. 197)

Before setting the EtherNet/IP parameters, all slaves must be connected to and addressed in the AS-i network.

► Project the AS-i slaves (→ Connect and address AS-i slaves (→ S. 111))

Page 112: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

112

>

6.6 Setup of the configuration interface 41410

To set up the EtherNet configuration interface (X3):

► >

► Select [IP setup] tab.

► Set the interface parameters (→ Notes on IP settings (→ S. 82)). >

6.7 Exchange AS-i slave 41506

AC1421/22 makes it possible to replace an AS-i slave by a new AS-i slave in the operating mode "protected mode".

Requirements:

> The new and the old AS-i slave have the same device profile(→ Profiles of AS-i slaves (→ S. 130)).

> The new AS-i slave has the address 0.

> Parameter [Automat. adressing] is activated (→ Set the monitoring functions of the AS-i master (→ S. 50)).

1 Remove old AS-i slave

► Disconnect the AS-i slave to be replaced from the AS-i network

> AC1421/22 detects a configuration error and generates a corresponding OSC message.

2 Install new AS-i slave

► Connect the new AS-i slave to the AS-i network.

> AC1421/22 detects the new AS-i slave and automatically assigns the address of the old AS-i slave.

> The OSC error message disappears.

> The new AS-i slave is operational.

Page 113: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

113

7 Troubleshooting Content

Status LED ...........................................................................................................................................113 Start screen: Status LEDs ....................................................................................................................114 Online diagnosis function .....................................................................................................................115 Online Support Center (OSC) ..............................................................................................................116 Display diagnostic protocol ...................................................................................................................118

41667

This chapter offers information regarding fault detection and troubleshooting.

7.1 Status LED 41692

The status LEDs of the device provide information about the current state of system components.

Position of the status LED on device: →Overview (→ S. 11)

>

7.1.1 Status LED: Basic device 41691

Status LED Description

H1 green on Device has started, warnings or error messages.

yellow flashes 0.5 Hz There is a warning but not an error message.

red flashes 2 Hz There is an error message.

>

7.1.2 Status LED: Fieldbus EtherNet/IP 41708

Status LED Description

H2 yellow off no data transmission

flashes Reception of data

H3 green off no physical connection

on Physical connection OK

H4 yellow off no data transmission

flashes Reception of data

H5 green off no physical connection

on Physical connection OK

Page 114: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

114

>

7.2 Start screen: Status LEDs 41688

The start screen of the graphic user interface proves the following status information (→Start screen (→ S. 36)): >

7.2.1 Status of the web interface 41707

Status LED Description

Web interface status

red on offline

green on online

This function is only available via the web interface of the device (→Remote access (→ S. 32)).

>

7.2.2 Operating mode of the AS-i master 41722

Status LED Description

AS-i 1|2 operating mode

yellow on projection mode

green on protected mode

>

7.2.3 Control instance of the AS-i outputs 41569

Status LED Description

Output control yellow on manually | manually via PLC

green on gateway | gateway with PLC

blue on PLC

>

7.2.4 Fieldbus status 41417

Status LED Meaning

EtherNet/IP red on EtherNet/IP inactive

green on EtherNet/IP active

Page 115: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

115

>

7.3 Online diagnosis function 41719

The device offers an online diagnosis function. It helps the user to find and eliminate the source of occuring failures and errors. >

7.3.1 Message types 41754

The online diagnostic function of AC1421/22 distinguishes 3 types of messages:

Symbol Message type Meaning

Error An error occurred; proper operation of the device is disturbed.

User action absolutely required

Warning An irregularity has occurred

User action required

Event An uncritical event has occurred

No user action required

>

7.3.2 Locate error sources 41743

The online diagnosis function helps the operator to locate the source of ooccuring warning and error messages. The menu symbols of the navigation path leading to the menu page, which generates a message, are overlain by a warning / error symbol. Thus, the operator can easily locate the error source.

Example:

> The following menu symbols are overlain by an error symbol:

Main navigation bar: [AS-i 1]

Sub navigation bar: [Slaves]

> Error source on menu page [AS-i 1] > [Slaves]

If a function unit of the device causes a warning and an error message at the same time, then the error symbol is displayed.

Page 116: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

116

>

7.4 Online Support Center (OSC) 41718

The Online Support Center (OSC) displays detailed information about occuring events, failures and errors.

The OSC has the following appearance:

List to select a filter and name of the selected filter

Message An message consists of error symbol, timestamp and detailed information about the errors

Number of the message displayed and total number of messages

Tabs to select a view [Current]: →OSC: View current error messages (→ S. 116) [History]: →OSC: Show message history (→ S. 117)

>

7.4.1 OSC: View current error messages 41726

The [Current] tab lists all current messages. The messages are in chronological order. All messages regarding warnings and errors are displayd.

Information about the different types of messages: →Message types (→ S. 115)

Overview of possible OSC messages of the device: →OSC messages (→ S. 198)

To view the error messages that are currently active:

1 Select the menu page

► On the start screen: Select [OSC]

► Select [Current] tab.

2 Show current messages

> The page shows the error messages that are currently active.

► Press [] to select the message field.

> The focus (orange frame) is on the message field.

► Use []/[] to go through the error messages.

3 Optional: filter messages

► Set the following parameters as required:

Parameter Description Possible values

[Filter] System component the message was created in

[All] Display all messages in chronological order of their occurrence (= preset).

[AS-i 1] Display messages that were created in AS-i master 1.

[AS-i 2] Display messages that were created in AS-i master 2 (only selectable for devices with 2 AS-i masters).

[System] Display messages that were created in the system.

> Page shows filtered messages. >

Page 117: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

117

7.4.2 OSC: Show message history 41733

The [History] tab lists all messages which occurred during the operating time of the device. The messages are shown in chronological order. The device displays messages regarding events, warnings and errors.

The messages are stored in a ring buffer. The ring buffer can store 2000 messages. If full, the device overwrites the oldest message(s) (time stamp).

There is a message pair for each failure (warning, error). It indicates the time of occurrence of the failure and the time at which the cause of the failure was rectified. The symbols of the messages are correspondingly marked.

Example: Error message

Time at which the error occurred

Time at which the cause of the fault was rectified.

To display the history of messages created so far again:

1 Select menu page

► On the start screen: Select [OSC].

► Select [History] tab.

2 Display all messages

> The page shows all previously generated error messages.

► Press [] to select the message field.

> The focus (orange frame) is on the message field.

► Use []/[] to go through the error messages.

3 Optional: Filter messages

► Set the following parameters as required:

Parameter Description Possible values

[Filter] System component the message was created in

[All] Display all messages in chronological order of their occurrence (= preset).

[AS-i 1] Display messages that were created in AS-i master 1.

[AS-i 2] Display messages that were created in AS-i master 2 (only selectable for devices with 2 AS-i masters).

[System] Display messages that were created in the system.

> Page shows filtered messages.

Page 118: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

118

>

7.5 Display diagnostic protocol 41439

To get an overview of the configuration and the current OSC messages, the operator can store the diagnostic protocol in the system

→ Store diagnostic protocol (→ S. 79)

Page 119: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

119

8 Appendix Content

Approval tests / certifications ................................................................................................................119 Technical data ......................................................................................................................................120 Address assignment in Ethernet networks ...........................................................................................122 Configuration interface: connection concepts ......................................................................................123 AS-i master ...........................................................................................................................................125 AS-i slaves ............................................................................................................................................129 Fieldbus EtherNet/IP ............................................................................................................................140 OSC messages ....................................................................................................................................198

33879 >

8.1 Approval tests / certifications 41524

Software-relevant certifications:

AS-i master profile M4 according to AS-i specification 3.0

Fieldbus certification: conform to EtherNet/IP specification

Page 120: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

120

>

8.2 Technical data

Content

Housing.................................................................................................................................................120 Display elements ..................................................................................................................................120 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................120 Power supply connections ....................................................................................................................120 Interfaces ..............................................................................................................................................121 Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) .................................................................................................121

34188

>

8.2.1 Housing 41477

Housing

Degrees of protection IP20

Material Aluminium, steel sheet, Makrolon

Dimensions (W x H x D) [mm] 93 x 128,2 x 106,2

>

8.2.2 Display elements 41442

Display

Technology LCD, colour

Size 35 x 28 mm (1.8“)

Resolution 220 x 176 pixels

Colour depth 18 bits (= 262 144 possible colours)

LED

Possible colours red, green, yellow

>

8.2.3 Operation 41714

Membrane keys

Function keys 2x

Navigation keys / arrow keys 4x

>

8.2.4 Power supply connections 41800

Power supply connections

AS-i 1, AS-i 2, FE plug-in, 6 poles, Combicon

24 V Power supply plug-in, 2 poles, Combicon

Page 121: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

121

>

8.2.5 Interfaces 41483

EtherNet configuration interface

Connection 2x RJ45

Transmission 10/100 Mbits/s

Protocol HTTP, FTP, Telnet

41483

EtherNet fieldbus interface

Connection 2x RJ45

Transmission rate 10/100 Mbits/s

Protocol EtherNet/IP

Jitter 0.7 ms

Switch integrated 2-port switch (iRT capable)

41483

SD card slot

Media SD memory cards (max. 32 Gbytes)

Format SDHC format is supported

Supported file formats FAT32

>

8.2.6 Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) 41770

Programmable Logic Controller (PLC)

Type CODESYS Control Runtime System (incl. CODESYS WebVisu)

Programming system CODESYS Development System (version V3.5 SP9 Patch 7 Hotfix 3 or higher)

Programming languages FBD, SFC, CFC, IL, LD, ST

Available memory for PLC applications / RETAIN variables

approx. 10 MB / 4072 bytes

Page 122: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

122

>

8.3 Address assignment in Ethernet networks 39571

In the Ethernet network every IP address MUST be unique.

The following IP addresses are reserved for network-internal purposes and are therefore not allowed as an address for participants: nnn.nnn.nnn.0 | nnn.nnn.nnn.255.

Only network participants whose subnet mask is identical and whose IP addresses are identical with respect to the subnet mask can communicate with each other.

Rule: If part of the subnet mask = 255, the corresponding IP address parts must be identical. If part of the subnet mask = 0, the corresponding IP address parts must be different.

If the subnet mask = 255.255.255.0, 254 participants communicating with each other are possible in the network. If the subnet mask = 255.255.0.0, 256x254 = 65 024 participants communicating with each other are possible in the network.

In the same physical network different subnet masks of the participants are allowed. They form different groups of participants which cannot communicate with groups of participants having other subnet masks.

In case of doubt or problems please contact your system administrator.

Examples:

Participant A IP address

Participant A Subnet mask

Participant B IP address

Participant B Subnet mask

Communication of participants possible?

192.168.82.247 255.255.255.0 192.168.82.10 255.255.255.0 Yes, 254 participants possible

192.168.82.247 255.255.255.0 192.168.82.247 255.255.255.0 No (same IP address)

192.168.82.247 255.255.255.0 192.168.82.10 255.255.0.0 No (different subnet mask)

192.168.82.247 255.255.255.0 192.168.116.10 255.255.255.0 No (different IP address range: 82 vs. 116)

192.168.222.213 255.255.0.0 192.168.222.123 255.255.0.0 Yes, 65 024 participants possible

192.168.111.213 255.255.0.0 192.168.222.123 255.255.0.0 Yes, 65 024 participants possible

192.168.82.247 255.255.255.0 192.168.82.0 255.255.255.0 No; the whole network is disturbed because the IP address xxx.xxx.xxx.0 is not allowed

Page 123: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

123

>

8.4 Configuration interface: connection concepts

Content

Direct link ..............................................................................................................................................123 Connection via Ethernet network .........................................................................................................124

41594

To be able to access the web interface and the programming interface of the device-internal PLC, the configuration interface (X3) must be connected to a computer. The device supports the following connection types:

Direct connection (→ Direct link (→ S. 123))

Connection via an EtherNet network (→ Connection via Ethernet network (→ S. 124)) >

8.4.1 Direct link 41458

To establish a direct connection to the device:

► Connect configuration interface X3 of the device with the Ethernet interface of the PC/laptop.

► Setup the IP parameters of the configuration interface according to the requirements (→ Address assignment in Ethernet networks (→ S. 122)).

> User can access the web interface and/or programming interface of the device.

Page 124: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

124

>

8.4.2 Connection via Ethernet network 41573

To establish a connection via a Ethernet network, the device has to be connected with a coupling element (e.g. Ethernet switch / WiFi router).

Use one of the following options: >

Option 1: Transmit fieldbus and web interface data via different networks 41716

► Connect configuration interface (X3) via Ethernet cable with the Ethernet switch / WiFi router (

► Set IP parameter of the configuration interface (X3) and the switch / WiFi router according to the requirements (→ Notes on IP settings (→ S. 82)).

► Connect PC / laptop with the Ethernet switch.

> User can accress the web interface and / or programming interface of the device.

OR:

► Connect PC / laptop / mobile device wireless with the WiFi router .

> User can accress the web interface and / or programming interface of the device.

>

Option 2: transfer fieldbus and web interface data over the same network 41715

► Connect the configuration interface (X3) to the EtherNet/IP interface (X7) using an EtherNet cable.

► Activate the DHCP function of the EtherNet switch for automatic assignment of IP addresses.

► Connect the EtherNet/IP interface (X6) to the EtherNet switch using an EtherNet cable.

► The parameter [Obtain IP address autom.] must be activated (→ Notes on IP settings (→ S. 82)).

► Connect the PC/laptop to the EtherNet switch using an EtherNet cable.

► If necessary, activate the option [Optain IP address automatically] in the IP settings of the PC/laptop.

> The device and the PC/laptop/mobile device are connected over the IP network.

Page 125: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

125

>

8.5 AS-i master

Content

Operating modes of the AS-i master ....................................................................................................126 Master flags ..........................................................................................................................................128

41540

Master = Handles the complete organisation on the bus. The master decides on the bus access time and polls the →slaves cyclically.

Page 126: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

126

>

8.5.1 Operating modes of the AS-i master

Content

Protected mode ....................................................................................................................................126 Projection mode ....................................................................................................................................126 Switch operating modes .......................................................................................................................127

41721

The AS-i master can be operated in one of the following operating modes: >

Protected mode 41761

In the operating mode "Protected mode" (= normal mode), the AS-i master only communicates with AS-i slaves that are entered in the list of projected slaves (LPS) and where current and target configuration match.

The AS-i master automatically detects the following actions and signals a configuration error:

an AS-i slave is added to the AS-i network (error message: Slave not projected)

an AS-i slave is removed from the AS-i network (error message: Slave not present)

Optionally, the operator can activate/deactivate the following monitoring functions (→ Set the monitoring functions of the AS-i master (→ S. 50)):

Automatic addressing: When a defective slave is replaced, the AS-i master controls the addressing. The new AS-i slave obtains the same address as the old AS-i slave if the following conditions are met:

The new AS-i slave has the address 0.

Both AS-i slaves have the same device profile.

Double address recognition: The AS-i master recognises whether one or several AS-i slaves have the same address (error message: Double address error).

Earth-fault detection: The AS-i master detects any earth faults.

In the operating mode "Protected mode", the operator can control the PLC applications stored on the device (start, stop, reset). >

Projection mode 41762

In the operating mode "Projection mode", the AS-i master communicates with all AS-i slaves that are connected to the AS-i line and do not have the address 0. Missing AS-i slaves are not detected by the AS-i master.

In projection mode a projection adaptation can be carried out. The AS-i master reads the configuration data of all detected AS-i slaves and saves it permanently.

Page 127: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

127

>

Switch operating modes 41702

The operator / programmer can switch the operating modes of the AS-i master as follows:

per GUI / web interface (→ Set the operating mode of the AS-i master (→ S. 49))

per function block Set_Mode (→ programming manual: Set_Mode)

If an AS-i slave with the address 0 is connected, then the AS-i master cannot switch from "projection mode" into "protected mode" !

► Address the AS-i slave correctly.

► Switch the operating mode.

Page 128: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

128

>

8.5.2 Master flags 41738

The master flags contain information about the status of the AS-i master and the fieldbus host.

The master flags are transmitted along with the input data of the digital AS-i slaves in the acyclic data set DS2 (→ Device Manual Supplement - Acyclic datasets and command interface).

Page 129: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

129

8.6 AS-i slaves

Content

Profiles of AS-i slaves ...........................................................................................................................130 41533

Slave = Passive participant on the bus, only replies on request of the →master. Slaves have a clearly defined and unique →address in the bus.

Page 130: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

130

>

8.6.1 Profiles of AS-i slaves

Content

Configuration data (CDI) of the slaves (slave profiles) .........................................................................131 Slave profiles for slaves with combined transaction .............................................................................138 Combined transaction – Use of analogue channels in the gateway depending on the slave profile ...139

41771

Page 131: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

131

>

Configuration data (CDI) of the slaves (slave profiles)

Content

Structure of the slave profile .................................................................................................................131 Description of the IO code for digital slaves .........................................................................................132 Description of the ID code (selection) ..................................................................................................132 Description of the extended ID code 1 .................................................................................................133 Description of the extended ID code 2 .................................................................................................133 Valid combinations IO code / ID code / extended ID code 2 ................................................................135

41591

The configuration data CDI (= Configuration Data Image) for single, A and B slaves is stored in a data word. The structure is shown below and is the same for all slaves. >

Structure of the slave profile 41709

The slave profile has the following structure: S-[IO code].[ID code].[ext. ID code2]

Bits 15...12 Bits 11...8 Bits 7...4 Bits 3...0

XID2 extended ID code 2

3rd figure in the slave profile

(AS-i slave v2.0 = 0xF *)

XID1 extended ID code 1

is no part of the slave profile

can be changed by the user

(AS-i slave v2.0 = 0xF *)

ID code ID code

2nd figure in the slave profile

IO code I/O configuration

1st figure in the slave profile

Example: AC2255 4 digital inputs, 2 digital outputs AS-i profile = S-7.A.E This results in the following configuration data of the slave:

0b1110 = 0xE (e.g.) 0b0111 = 0x7 0b1010 = 0xA 0b0111 = 0x7

The corresponding CDI data word is: 11100111 10100111 = 0xE7A7

*) AS-i slaves according to the AS-i specification 2.0 and older do not support the extended ID codes 1 and 2. In the master 0xF is stored for this configuration data.

Page 132: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

132

>

Description of the IO code for digital slaves 41588

Structure slave profile = S-[IO-Code].x.x

IO code [hex]

IO code (bits 3…0)

Function of the periphery bit

D3 D2 D1 D0

0 0000 input input input input

1 0001 output input input input

2 0010 input / output input input input

3 0011 output output input input

4 0100 input / output input / output input input

5 0101 output output output input

6 0110 input / output input / output input / output input

7 0111 input / output input / output input / output input / output

8 1000 output output output output

9 1001 input output output output

A 1010 input / output output output output

B 1011 input input output output

C 1100 input / output input / output output output

D 1101 input input input output

E 1110 input / output input / output input / output output

F 1111 not allowed

>

Description of the ID code (selection) 41589

Structure slave profile = S-x.[ID-Code].x

ID code [hex]

ID code (Bits 3…0)

Description

0 0000 4 I/O connections for binary sensors and/or actuators with 1 signal each

1 0001 2 dual-signal I/O connections for binary sensors and/or actuators with 2 signals each

A 1010 slave operates in the extended addressing mode (B slave or A/B slave)

B 1011 slave corresponds to Safety-at-Work

F 1111 manufacturer-specific device (cannot be replaced with products from other manufacturers)

Page 133: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

133

>

Description of the extended ID code 1 41585

Can be changed by the user, however not a part of the slave profile.

Default value: 0xF for single slaves 0x7 for A/B slaves

The value is evaluated and checked by the master. The user can make an additional distinction between slaves which do not differ in the AS-i system, e.g. slaves with different ranges for current, voltage or frequency. This prevents damage when replacing slaves with a wrong performance range.

>

Description of the extended ID code 2 41590

>

Extended ID code 2 for analogue slaves with profile 7.3.x 41514

The extended ID code 2 is used to specify complex slaves.

Structure slave profile = S-7.3.[ext.ID code2]

Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Description

0 0 1-channel slave

0 1 2-channel slave

1 0 4-channel slave

1 1 4-channel slave (if slave has no extended ID code)

0 transparent data exchange = binary bits

1 analogue value transmission

0 output slave

1 input slave

The ID code 2 results from a combination of the options stated above.

Page 134: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

134

>

Extended ID code 2 for analogue slaves with profile 7.4.x 41513

The extended ID code 2 is used to specify complex slaves.

Structure slave profile = S-7.3.[ext. ID code2]

Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Description

0 0 1-channel slave

0 1 2-channel slave

1 0 4-channel slave

1 1 4-channel slave (if slave has no extended ID code)

0 0 0 0 4 binary inputs + 4 binary outputs

0 output slave

1 input slave

The ID code 2 results from a combination of the options stated above.

Page 135: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

135

>

Valid combinations IO code / ID code / extended ID code 2 41677

Structure slave profile = S-[IO code].[ID code].[ext. ID code2]

IO code [hex]

ID code [hex]

Ext. ID code 2

[hex] Meaning

0…E not: 9, B, D

0 x binary I/O connections for sensors and actuators

0, 3, 8 1 x 1 or 2 binary sensors or actuators with 2 signals each (dual-signal devices)

0 1 x 4 binary inputs for 2 dual-signal sensors

0…E not: 2A

A x slave operates in the "extended addressing mode" (B slave or A/B slave)

0 A E slave with extended address function: 4 binary inputs for 2 dual-signal sensors (e.g. I/O module AC2250)

0 B x slave corresponds to Safety-at-Work

0…E F x manufacturer-specific device (cannot be replaced by other products)

1 1 x single sensor with remote setting: 3 binary inputs + 1 binary output (e.g. sensor OC5226)

3 1 x 2 binary inputs for 1 dual-signal sensor AND 2 binary outputs for 1 dual-signal actuator

3 A x slave with extended address function

3 A 1 slave with extended address function: 2 binary inputs + 1 binary output

3 A 2 slave with extended address function: 4 binary inputs

6 0 x quick combined transaction type 5 of 8, 12 or 16 data bits by using 2, 3 or 4 slave addresses in a slave

7 0 F motor starter 2I + 2O (e.g. ZB0032)

7 0 E 4 binary inputs + 4 binary outputs (e.g. I/O module AC2251)

7 1 x interface for the transmission of 6...18-bit signals; analogue profile for combined transaction type 1; was replaced by S-7.3

7 2 x extended slave profile for the transmission of 6...18-bit signals; extended analogue profile for combined transaction type 1; was replaced by S-7.4

7 3 x

slave profile for 16-bit transmission with integrated support in the master; integrated analogue profile for combined transaction type 1

(Extended ID code 2 for analogue slaves with profile 7.3.x (→ S. 133))

7 3 5 2 analogue outputs of 16 bits each (e.g. I/O module AC2618)

7 3 6 4 analogue outputs of 16 bits each (e.g. I/O module AC2518)

7 3 C 1 analogue input of 16 bits (e.g. sensor PPA020)

7 3 D 2 analogue inputs of 16 bits each (e.g. I/O module AC2616)

7 3 E 4 analogue inputs of 16 bits each (e.g. I/O module AC2516)

7 4 x

extended slave profile for 16-bit transmission with integrated support in the master; integrated extended analogue profile for combined transaction type 1

(Extended ID code 2 for analogue slaves with profile 7.4.x (→ S. 134))

7 4 C RFID identification system for writing and reading RFID tags 15-bit data + 1-bit messages (e.g. DTA100)

7 A x slave operates in the "extended addressing mode" (B slave or A/B slave)

Page 136: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

136

IO code [hex]

ID code [hex]

Ext. ID code 2

[hex] Meaning

7 A 5 slave operates in the "extended addressing mode" (B slave or A/B slave) combined slave; supports combined transaction type 2

7 A 7 slave operates in the "extended addressing mode" (B slave or A/B slave) 4 binary inputs + 4 binary outputs

7 A 8 slave operates in the "extended addressing mode" (B slave or A/B slave) 1 channel for combined transaction type 4

7 A 9 slave operates in the "extended addressing mode" (B slave or A/B slave) dual channel for combined transaction type 4

7 A A slave operates in the "extended addressing mode" (B slave or A/B slave) 8 binary inputs + 8 binary outputs

7 A E slave operates in the "extended addressing mode" (B slave or A/B slave); dual sensor with actuator interface (e.g. sensor AC2317); 2 binary inputs + 2 binary outputs

7 B x safety slave with non-safe outputs

7 B 0 safety slave with non-safe outputs; 2 safe binary inputs (e.g. I/O module AC005S)

7 B E

safety sensor with non-safe outputs; 2 safe binary inputs AND 2 safe binary outputs AND 2 non-safe (relay) outputs (e.g. I/O module AC009S)

7 D x device for motor control (electromechanical)

7 D 0 electromechanical motor control with open sub-profile

7 D 1 electromechanical direct starter

7 D 2 electromechanical reverser

7 D 3 electromechanical direct starter with brake

7 D 4 electromechanical reverser with brake

7 D 5 electromechanical direct starter with accessories

7 D 6 electromechanical reverser with accessories

7 E x device for motor control (electronic)

7 E 0 electronic motor control with open sub-profile

7 E 1 electronic direct starter

7 E 2 electronic reverser

7 E 3 electronic direct starter with brake

7 E 4 electronic reverser with brake

7 E 5 electronic direct starter with accessories

7 E 6 electronic reverser with accessories

8 1 x 4 binary outputs for 2 dual-signal actuators

B 1 x dual-signal actuator with feedback: 2 binary outputs + 2 binary inputs

B A 5 slave operates in the "extended addressing mode" (B slave or A/B slave); supports combined transaction type 2

B A E slave operates in the "extended addressing mode" (B slave or A/B slave); 2 binary outputs + 2 binary inputs (e.g. AC2086 module)

D 1 x single actuator with monitoring: 1 binary output + 3 binary inputs

x = any value (0...F)

Page 137: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

137

Devices with M4 master profile enable connection of slaves with more than 4 digital inputs/outputs. The transmission is combined: Part of the data transmission is carried out via the digital bits D0...D3, another part via the "analogue" channels.

The more data is transmitted, the longer it takes until all data of a slave has been transmitted.

Cycle time single slave = 5 ms Cycle time A/B slave (if address is only assigned to A or B slave) = 5 ms Cycle time A/B slave (if address is assigned to A and B slave) = 10 ms The cycle time for CTT transmission is a multiple of these values for individual data.

CTT = Combined Transaction Type

Page 138: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

138

>

Slave profiles for slaves with combined transaction 41654

Structure slave profile = S-[IO-Code].[ID-Code].[ext.ID-Code2]

Slave profile

Master profile

Assignment analogue channels in the device

Bits D0…D3

Additional acyclic string

data transaction

Combined transaction

CTT

Number of channels

Use analogue / digital

S-6.0 M4 1 I

and 1 O

2/3/4 x 4 binary inputs and

2/3/4 x 4 binary outputs –– no type 5

S-7.3 M3 1/2/4 I

or 1/2/4 O

1/2/4 analogue inputs or

1/2/4 binary outputs –– no type 1

S-7.4 M3 1/2/4 I

or 1/2/4 O

1/2/4 analogue inputs or

1/2/4 binary outputs

4 inputs or

4 outputs yes type 1

S-7.5.5 M4 0…4 I and

0…4 O

0…4 analogue inputs or

< 65 binary inputs and

0…4 analogue outputs or

< 65 binary outputs

2 inputs and

2 outputs yes type 2

S-7.A.5 M4 0…2 I and

0…2 O

0…2 analogue inputs or

< 33 binary inputs and

0…2 analogue outputs or

< 33 binary outputs

2 inputs and

1 output yes type 2

S-7.A.7 M4 –– –– 4 inputs

and 4 outputs

no type 3

S-7.A.8 M4

1 I

1 analogue input or

< 17 binary inputs 1 output no type 4

S-7.A.9 M4

2 I

2 analogue inputs or

< 33 binary inputs –– no type 4

S-7.A.A M4 1 I

and 1 O

8 binary inputs and

8 binary outputs –– no type 3

S-B.A.5 M4 0…2 I and

0…2 O

0…2 analogue inputs or

< 33 binary inputs and

0…2 analogue outputs or

< 33 binary outputs

–– yes type 2

Legend colour pattern:

binary inputs binary outputs analogue inputs analogue outputs

Page 139: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

139

>

Combined transaction – Use of analogue channels in the gateway depending on the slave profile 41592

Transaction Slave profile

Slave type

Number channels

Analogue input channels Analogue output channels

CH3 CH2 CH1 CH0 Trans. CH3 CH2 CH1 CH0 Trans.

CTT5 6.0.x S 1 – – – b – – – – b –

CTT1

7.3.C S 1 – – – a – – – – – –

7.3.D S 2 – – a a – – – – – –

7.3.E S 4 a a a a – – – – – –

7.3.4 S 1 – – – – – – – – a –

7.3.5 S 2 – – – – – – – a a –

7.3.6 S 4 – – – – – a a a a –

7.3.C S 1 – – – a – – – – – –

7.3.D S 2 – – a a – – – – – –

7.3.E S 4 a a a a – – – – – –

7.3.4 S 1 – – – – – – – – a –

7.3.5 S 2 – – – – – – – a a –

7.3.6 S 4 – – – – – a a a a –

CTT1

7.4.4 S 1 – – – – – – – – a X

7.4.5 S 2 – – – – – – – a a X

7.4.6 S 4 – – – – – a a a a X

7.4.C S 1 – – – a X – – – – –

7.4.D S 2 – – a a X – – – – –

7.4.E S 4 a a a a X – – – – –

CTT2 7.5.5 S 0…4 a b a b a b a b X a b a b a b a b X

CTT2 7.A.5 A 0…2 – – a b a b X – – a b a b X

7.A.5 B 0…2 a b a b – – X a b a b – – X

CTT3 7.A.7 A –

only binary –

only binary –

B – – –

CTT4 7.A.8 A 1 – – – a b – – – – – –

B 1 – a b – – – – – – – –

CTT4 7.A.9 A 2 – – a b a b – – – – – –

B 2 a b a b – – – – – – – –

CTT3 7.A.A A 1 – – – b – – – – b –

B 1 – b – – – – b – – –

CTT2 B.A.5 A 0…2 – – a b a b X – – a b a b X

B.A.5 B 0…2 a b a b – – X a b a b – – X

CHn = channel Trans. = transparent mode

S = single slave A = A slave B = B slave

a = analogue inputs/outputs (word) b = binary inputs/outputs (bits) – = not used

X = additional acyclic transaction of strings for device, parameters, diagnosis

Legend colour pattern:

binary inputs binary outputs analogue inputs analogue outputs

Page 140: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

140

>

8.7 Fieldbus EtherNet/IP

Content

Fieldbus objects ....................................................................................................................................140 Fieldbus parameters .............................................................................................................................141 Device-specific parameters ..................................................................................................................142 Cyclic data ............................................................................................................................................162 Acyclic data ..........................................................................................................................................186 EtherNet/IP projection software: Programmers' notes .........................................................................193

12469

Information about EtherNet/IP: www.odva.org (umbrella organisation)

>

8.7.1 Fieldbus objects 41516

EtherNet/IP is based on the Common Industrial Protocol (CIP). CIP encloses services and applications in so-called object classes. Each object class has certain features (attributes) and defined interfaces which can be used to access the functions of the object instance.

The AC1421/22 uses the following object classes:

Assembly instance objects for the transmission of

device and EtherNet/IP parameters (→Parameter data (→ S. 140))

Cyclic process data, diagnostic data (→Cyclic data)

Manufacturer-specific objects for the transmission of acyclic data (→Acyclic data (→ S. 141)) >

Parameter data 41784

The paramater data is transfered via the Configuration Assembly Object:

Object class [dec]

Instance [dec]

Attribute [dec]

Content Access r = read w = write

max. no. of words

4 175 3 Parameter data (module configuration, device-specific parameters) r/w 122

Page 141: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

141

>

Cyclic data 41570

Cyclic data is transferred in dynamic assembly objects:

Object class [dec]

Instance [dec]

Attribute [dec]

Content Access r = read w = write

max. no. of words

4 100 3 Cyclic data from AC1421/22 to the I/O scanner (EtherNet/IP slots 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 10, 13, 14)

r max. 248

4 150 3 Cyclic data from the I/O scanner to AC1421/22 (EtherNet/IP slots 2, 4, 6, 8, 11, 12, 15)

r/w max. 248

>

Acyclic data 41543

Acyclic data is transferred in manufacturer-specific objects:

Object class [dec]

Instance [dec]

Attribute [dec]

Content Access r = read w = write

max. no. of words

801 1 1, 21, 22 Acyclic data sets (system) r 248

32 ... 47 Acyclic data sets (AS-i Master 1) r/w* 248

64 ... 79 Acyclic data sets (AS-i Master 2) r/w* 248

801 1 30 Command request channel, system r/w 248

31 Command reply channel, system r 248

801 1 62 Command request channel, AS-i Master 1 r/w 248

63 Command reply channel, AS-i Master 1 r 248

801 1 94 Command request channel, AS-i Master 2 r/w 248

95 Command reply channel, AS-i Master 2 r 248

* ... depends on acyclic data set (→ Overview: acyclic data sets (DSx) (→ S. 189))

>

8.7.2 Fieldbus parameters 41508

The fieldbus parameters provide information for the integration of the device into the EtherNet/IP network. The fieldbus parameters are set directly on the device.

Parameter Meaning Value range

IP address IP address (IPv4) of the device's EtherNet/IP interface

e.g.: 192.168.0.200

Subnet mask Subnet mask of the EtherNet/IP network segment

e.g.: 255.255.255.0

Gateway address IP address (IPv4) of the EtherNet/IP gateway

e.g.: 192.168.0.100

>

Page 142: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

142

>

8.7.3 Device-specific parameters

Content

Parameters: Independent mode ...........................................................................................................142 Parameters: Top-down mode ...............................................................................................................143 Parameter setting via the configuration assembly object .....................................................................145 EDS-file.................................................................................................................................................161

41583

The device-specific parameters allow you to make individual adjustments to the system. Depending on the selected configuration mode, the following parameters are available. >

Parameters: Independent mode 41806

Parameter Description Value range

Analogue channels per input slave Number of analogue channels per input slave

4 channels* 4 channels (variable slave assignment)

2 channels 2 channels (fixed slave assignment)

1 channel 1 channel (fixed slave assignment)

1 channel per A/B slave

1 channel per A/B slave (fixed slave assignment)

Analogue channels per output slave Number of analogue channels per output slave

4 channels* 4 channels (variable slave assignment)

2 channels 2 channels (fixed slave assignment)

1 channel 1 channel (fixed slave assignment)

1 channel per A/B slave

1 channel per A/B slave (fixed slave assignment)

Fail-safe state Behaviour of the slave outputs if an interrupted fieldbus connection is detected

Reset outputs*

All AS-i outputs are switched off in case of an interrupted EtherNet/IP connection (value = 0).

Hold outputs The outputs are held in the last valid state that existed before the interrupted connection was detected.

Change byte order Byte order in a word

Setting applies to all data of object class 4, instances 100 and 150

Disabled* Byte order in word remains unchanged.

Enabled Byte order in word is inverted.

* ... Default setting

In the 'Independent' configuration mode, the device-specific parameters are configured via the GUI of the device (→Configuration mode: Independent (→ S. 197)).

Page 143: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

143

>

Parameters: Top-down mode 41805

Parameter Description Value range

Analogue channels per input slave Number of analogue channels per input slave

4 channels* 4 channels (variable slave assignment)

2 channels 2 channels (fixed slave assignment)

1 channel 1 channel (fixed slave assignment)

1 channel per A/B slave

1 channel per A/B slave (fixed slave assignment)

Analogue channels per output slave Number of analogue channels per output slave

4 channels* 4 channels (variable slave assignment)

2 channels 2 channels (fixed slave assignment)

1 channel 1 channel (fixed slave assignment)

1 channel per A/B slave

1 channel per A/B slave (fixed slave assignment)

Modify slave order analogue IN Order of analogue input slaves can be changed

Disabled* The order of slaves remains unchanged (basic setting).

Enabled The order of slaves can be changed (parameters in the following row).

1st analogue IN slave (slot 9) ... 15th analogue IN slave (slot 9)

1st analogue IN slave (slot 10) ... 15th analogue IN slave (slot 10)

Assignment of analogue input slaves 1 to 15 of AS-i master 1/2 to AS-i slave addresses

These settings are only effective if parameters Analogue channels per input slave = 4 channels and Modify slave order analogue IN = Enabled

Slave 1 AS-i master 1 Slave 2 AS-i master 1 ... Slave 31 AS-i master 1 Slave 1 AS-i master 2 Slave 2 AS-i master 2 ... Slave 31 AS-i master 2

Modify slave order analogue OUT Order of analogue output slaves can be changed

Disabled The order of slaves remains unchanged (basic setting).

Enabled The order of slaves can be changed (parameters in the following row).

1st analogue OUT slave (slot 11) ... 15th analogue OUT slave (slot 11)

1st analogue OUT slave (slot 12) ... 15th analogue OUT slave (slot 12)

Assignment of analogue output slaves 1 to 15 of AS-i master 1/2 to AS-i slave addresses

These parameters are only effective if parameters Analogue channels per out slave = 4 channels and Modify slave order analogue OUT = Enabled

Slave 1 AS-i master 1 Slave 2 AS-i master 1 ... Slave 31 AS-i master 1 Slave 1 AS-i master 2 Slave 2 AS-i master 2 ... Slave 31 AS-i master 2*

Fail-safe state Behaviour of the slave outputs if an interrupted fieldbus connection is detected

Reset outputs*

All AS-i outputs are switched off in case of an interrupted Profinet connection (value = 0).

Hold outputs The outputs are held in the last valid state that existed before the interrupted connection was detected.

Page 144: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

144

Parameter Description Value range

Change byte order Change byte order in a word

Setting applies to all data of object class 4, instances 100 and 150

Disabled* Byte order in a word remains unchanged.

Enabled Byte order in a word is inverted.

AS-i parameter download Transmission of AS-i slave parameters from host to AC1421/22

Disabled* The following AS-i parameter data is NOT sent to the AS-i system.

Enabled* The following AS-i parameter data is sent to the AS-i system.

Param. slave 1(A) AS-i master 1 … Param. slave 31(A) AS-i master 1

Param. slave 1B AS-i master 1 … Param. slave 31B AS-i master 1

Param. slave 1(A) AS-i master 2 … Param. slave 31(A) AS-i master 2

Param. slave 1B AS-i master 2 … Param. slave 31B AS-i master 2

Parameters P3...P0 of the individual AS-i slaves

P3...P0 = 0x0 (= 0b0000) ... P3...P0 = 0xF (= 0b1111) for single slaves* P3...P0 = 0x7 (= 0b0111) for A/B slaves*

* ... Default settings

In 'Top-down' configuration mode, the device-specific parameters are set via the fieldbus projection software (→Configuration mode: Top-Down (→ S. 196)).

Page 145: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

145

>

Parameter setting via the configuration assembly object

Content

Device-specific parameters ..................................................................................................................146 Parameters of the fieldbus slots ...........................................................................................................155 Derivation of parameter values for free slave assignment .................................................................161

41804

In → Configuration mode: Top-Down (→ S. 196), the parameter data are set in the EtherNet/IP projection software (→ Configuration mode: Top-Down (→ S. 196)). By means of the configuration assembly object, the configuration is then transferred to the device and activated.

Only when a connection is established by the I/O scanner will the parameter data configured via the configuration assembly object be transferred to the device. Changes to the parameter data in the online mode of the controller will therefore only become effective after the next connection.

To trigger a new connection setup, perform one of the following actions:

Reboot the device

Perform a system reset (→ System reset (→ S. 79))

Briefly interrupt the EtherNet/IP connection between the I/O scanner and the device

Transfer the project from the higher-level controller to the device (download)

Restart the I/O scanner

The configuration in top-down mode includes the following parameters:

Parameters of the fieldbus slots (→ S. 155)

Device-specific parameters (→ S. 146)

Page 146: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

146

>

Device-specific parameters 41582

Data points in the configuration assembly

Possible setting values

[hex]

Default values when using EDS

file

Description

with EDS without EDS

AC1421 AC1422

C.Failsafe state n=60 00 X X Reset AS-i outputs

01 Hold AS-i outputs

C.Swap byteorder n=61 00 X X deactivated

01 activated

C.Analogue channels IN

n=62 01 1 channel

02 2 channels

04 X X 4 channels

0B 1 channel per A/B

C.Analogue channels OUT

n=63 01 1 channel

02 2 channels

04 X X 4 channels

0B 1 channel per A/B

C.Analogue IN order 1

n=64 00 X X deactivated

01 activated

C.1st analogue IN Slot 9 2

n=65 41 ... 5F 41 41

AS-i 1 slave 1... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1... 31

C.2nd analogue IN Slot 9 2

n=66 41 ... 5F 42 42

AS-i 1 slave 1, 2 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1... 31

C.3rd analogue IN Slot 9 2

n=67 41 ... 5F 43 43

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 3 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31

C.4th analogue IN Slot 9 2

n=68 41 ... 5F 44 44

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 4 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31

C.5th analogue IN Slot 9 2

n=69 41 ... 5F 45 45

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 5 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31

C.6th analogue IN Slot 9 2

n=70 41 ... 5F 46 46

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 6 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1... 31

C.7th analogue IN Slot 9 2

n=71 41 ... 5F 47 47

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 7 .... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31

C.8th analogue IN Slot 9 2

n=72 41 ... 5F 48 48

AS-i 1 slave 1 .. 8 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31

C.9th analogue IN Slot 9 2

n=73 41 ... 5F 49 49

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 9 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31

C.10th analogue IN Slot 9 2

n=74 41 ... 5F 4A 4A

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 10 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31

C.11th analogue IN Slot 9 2

n=75 41 ... 5F 4B 4B

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 11 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31

Page 147: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

147

Data points in the configuration assembly

Possible setting values

[hex]

Default values when using EDS

file

Description

with EDS without EDS

AC1421 AC1422

C.12th analogue IN Slot 9 2

n=76 41 ... 5F 4C 4D

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 12 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31

C.13th analogue IN Slot 9 2

n=77 41 ... 5F 4D 4D

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 13 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31

C.14th analogue IN Slot 9 2

n=78 41 ... 5F 4E 4E

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 14 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31

C.15th analogue IN Slot 9 2

n=79 41 ... 5F 4F 4F

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 15 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31

C.1st analogue IN Slot 10 2

n=80 41 ... 5F 81 81

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31

C.2nd analogue IN Slot 10 2

n=81 41 ... 5F 82 82

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1, 2 ... 31

C.3rd analogue IN Slot 10 2

n=82 41 ... 5F 83 83

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 3 ... 31

C.4th analogue IN Slot 10 2

n=83 41 ... 5F 84 84

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 4 ... 31

C.5th analogue IN Slot 10 2

n=84 41 ... 5F 85 85

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 5 ... 31

C.6th analogue IN Slot 10 2

n=85 41 ... 5F 86 86

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 6 ... 31

C.7th analogue IN Slot 10 2

n=86 41 ... 5F 87 87

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 7 ... 31

C.8th analogue IN Slot 10 2

n=87 41 ... 5F 88 88

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 8 ... 31

C.9th analogue IN Slot 10 2

n=88 41 ... 5F 89 89

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 9 ... 31

C.10th analogue IN Slot 10 2

n=89 41 ... 5F 8A 8A

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 10 ... 31

C.11th analogue IN Slot 10 2

n=90 41 ... 5F 8B 8B

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 11 ... 31

C.12th analogue IN Slot 10 2

n=91 41 ... 5F 8C 8C

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 12 ... 31

C.13th analogue IN Slot 10 2

n=92 41 ... 5F 8D 8D

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 13 ... 31

C.14th analogue IN Slot 10 2

n=93 41 ... 5F 8E 8E

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 14 ... 31

C.15th analogue IN Slot 10 2

n=94 41 ... 5F 8F 8F

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 15 ... 31

Page 148: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

148

Data points in the configuration assembly

Possible setting values

[hex]

Default values when using EDS

file

Description

with EDS without EDS

AC1421 AC1422

C.Analogue OUT order 1

n=95 00 X X deactivated

01 activated

C.1st analogue OUT Slot 11 3

n=96 41 ... 5F 50 50

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 16 ...31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31

C.2nd analogue OUT

Slot 11 3

n=97 41 ... 5F 51 51

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 17 ...31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31

C.3rd analogue OUT Slot 11 3

n=98 41 ... 5F 52 52

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 18 ...31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31

C.4th analogue OUT Slot 11 3

n=99 41 ... 5F 53 53

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 19 ...31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31

C.5th analogue OUT Slot 11 3

n=100 41 ... 5F 54 54

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 20 ...31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31

C.6th analogue OUT Slot 11 3

n=101 41 ... 5F 55 55

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 21 ...31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31

C.7th analogue OUT Slot 11 3

n=102 41 ... 5F 56 56

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 22 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31

C.8th analogue OUT Slot 11 3

n=103 41 ... 5F 57 57

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 23 ...31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31

C.9th analogue OUT Slot 11 3

n=104 41 ... 5F 58 58

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 24 ...31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31

C.10th analogue OUT slot 11 3

n=105 41 ... 5F 59 59

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 25 ...31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31

C.11th analogue OUT slot 11 3

n=106 41 ... 5F 5A 5A

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 26 ...31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31

C.12th analogue OUT slot 11 3

n=107 41 ... 5F 5B 5B

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 27 ...31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31

C.13th analogue OUT slot 11 3

n=108 41 ... 5F 5C 5C

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 28 ...31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31

C.14th analogue OUT slot 11 3

n=109 41 ... 5F 5D 5D

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 29 ...31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31

C.15th analogue OUT slot 11 3

n=110 41 ... 5F 5E 5E

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 30, 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31

C.1st analogue OUT Slot 12 3

n=111 41 ... 5F 91 91

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 16 ... 31

C.2nd analogue OUT

Slot 12 3

n=112 41 ... 5F 92 92

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 17 ... 31

C.3rd analogue OUT Slot 12 3

n=113 41 ... 5F 93 93

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 18 ... 31

Page 149: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

149

Data points in the configuration assembly

Possible setting values

[hex]

Default values when using EDS

file

Description

with EDS without EDS

AC1421 AC1422

C.4th analogue OUT Slot 12 3

n=114 41 ... 5F 94 94

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 19 ... 31

C.5th analogue OUT slot 12 3

n=115 41 ... 5F 95 95

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 20 ... 31

C.6th analogue OUT slot 12 3

n=116 41 ... 5F 96 96

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 21 ... 31

C.7th analogue OUT slot 12 3

n=117 41 ... 5F 97 97

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 22 ... 31

C.8th analogue OUT slot 12 3

n=118 41 ... 5F 98 98

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 23 ... 31

C.9th analogue OUT slot 12 3

n=119 41 ... 5F 99 99

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 24 ... 31

C.10th analogue OUT slot 12 3

n=120 41 ... 5F 9A 9A

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 25 ... 31

C.11th analogue OUT slot 12 3

n=121 41 ... 5F 9B 9B

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 26 ... 31

C.12th analogue OUT slot 12 3

n=122 41 ... 5F 9B 9B

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 27 ... 31

C.13th analogue OUT slot 12 3

n=123 41 ... 5F 9C 9C

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 28 ... 31

C.14th analogue OUT slot 12 3

n=124 41 ... 5F 9D 9D

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 29 ... 31

C.15th analogue OUT slot 12 3

n=125 41 ... 5F 9E 9E

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 30, 31

C.AS-i Parameter Download 1

n=126 00 X X deactivated

01 activated

C.Parameter slave 1(A) AS-i 1 4

n=127 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i slave 1(A)

C.Parameter slave 2(A) AS-i 1 4

n=128 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 2(A)

C.Parameter slave 3(A) AS-i 1 4

n=129 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 3(A)

C.Parameter slave 4(A) AS-i 1 4

n=130 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 4(A)

C.Parameter slave 5(A) AS-i 1 4

n=131 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 5(A)

C.Parameter slave 6(A) AS-i 1 4

n=132 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 6(A)

C.Parameter slave 7(A) AS-i 1 4

n=133 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 7(A)

Page 150: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

150

Data points in the configuration assembly

Possible setting values

[hex]

Default values when using EDS

file

Description

with EDS without EDS

AC1421 AC1422

C.Parameter slave 8(A) AS-i 1 4

n=134 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 8(A)

C.Parameter slave 9(A) AS-i 1 4

n=135 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 9(A)

C.Parameter slave 10(A) AS-i 1 4

n=136 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 10(A)

C.Parameter slave 11(A) AS-i 1 4

n=137 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 11(A)

C.Parameter slave 12(A) AS-i 1 4

n=138 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 12(A)

C.Parameter slave 13(A) AS-i 1 4

n=139 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 13(A)

C.Parameter slave 14(A) AS-i 1 4

n=140 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 14(A)

C.Parameter slave 15(A) AS-i 1 4

n=141 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i slave 15(A)

C.Parameter slave 16(A) AS-i 1 4

n=142 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 16(A)

C.Parameter slave 17(A) AS-i 1 4

n=143 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 17(A)

C.Parameter slave 18(A) AS-i 1 4

n=144 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 18(A)

C.Parameter slave 19(A) AS-i 1 4

n=145 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 19(A)

C.Parameter slave 20(A) AS-i 1 4

n=146 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 20(A)

C.Parameter slave 21(A) AS-i 1 4

n=147 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 21(A)

C.Parameter slave 22(A) AS-i 1 4

n=148 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 22(A)

C.Parameter slave 23(A) AS-i 1 4

n=149 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 23(A)

C.Parameter slave 24(A) AS-i 1 4

n=150 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 24(A)

C.Parameter slave 25(A) AS-i 1 4

n=151 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 25(A)

C.Parameter slave 26(A) AS-i 1 4

n=152 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 26(A)

C.Parameter slave 27(A) AS-i 1 4

n=153 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 27(A)

C.Parameter slave 28(A) AS-i 1 4

n=154 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 28(A)

C.Parameter slave 29(A) AS-i 1 4

n=155 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 29(A)

C.Parameter slave 30(A) AS-i 1 4

n=156 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 30(A)

C.Parameter slave 31(A) AS-i 1 4

n=157 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 31(A)

Page 151: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

151

Data points in the configuration assembly

Possible setting values

[hex]

Default values when using EDS

file

Description

with EDS without EDS

AC1421 AC1422

C.Parameter slave 1B AS-i 1 4

n=158 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 1B

C.Parameter slave 2B AS-i 1 4

n=159 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 2B

C.Parameter slave 3B AS-i 1 4

n=160 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 3B

C.Parameter slave 4B AS-i 1 4

n=161 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 4B

C.Parameter slave 5B AS-i 1 4

n=162 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 5B

C.Parameter slave 6B AS-i 1 4

n=163 00 ... 0F 07 7 Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 6B

C.Parameter slave 7B AS-i 1 4

n=1564 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 7B

C.Parameter slave 8B AS-i 1 4

n=165 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 8B

C.Parameter slave 9B AS-i 1 4

n=166 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 9B

C.Parameter slave 10B AS-i 1 4

n=167 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 10B

C.Parameter slave 11B AS-i 1 4

n=168 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 11B

C.Parameter slave 12B AS-i 1 4

n=169 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 12B

C.Parameter slave 13B AS-i 1 4

n=170 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 13B

C.Parameter slave 14B AS-i 1 4

n=171 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 14B

C.Parameter slave 15B AS-i 1 4

n=172 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 15B

C.Parameter slave 16B AS-i 1 4

n=173 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 16B

C.Parameter slave 17B AS-i 1 4

n=174 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 17B

C.Parameter slave 18B AS-i 1 4

n=175 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 18B

C.Parameter slave 19B AS-i 1 4

n=176 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 19B

C.Parameter slave 20B AS-i 1 4

n=177 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 20B

C.Parameter slave 21B AS-i 1 4

n=178 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 21B

C.Parameter slave 22B AS-i 1 4

n=179 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 22B

C.Parameter slave 23B AS-i 1 4

n=180 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 23B

C.Parameter slave 24B AS-i 1 4

n=181 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 24B

Page 152: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

152

Data points in the configuration assembly

Possible setting values

[hex]

Default values when using EDS

file

Description

with EDS without EDS

AC1421 AC1422

C.Parameter slave 25B AS-i 1 4

n=182 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 25B

C.Parameter slave 26B AS-i 1 4

n=183 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 26B

C.Parameter slave 27B AS-i 1 4

n=184 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 27B

C.Parameter slave 28B AS-i 1 4

n=185 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 28B

C.Parameter slave 29B AS-i 1 4

n=186 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 29B

C.Parameter slave 30B AS-i 1 4

n=187 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 30B

C.Parameter slave 31B AS-i 1 4

n=188 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 31B

C.Parameter slave 1(A) AS-i 2 4

n=189 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 1(A)

C.Parameter slave 2(A) AS-i 2 4

n=190 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 2(A)

C.Parameter slave 3(A) AS-i 2 4

n=191 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 3(A)

C.Parameter slave 4(A) AS-i 2 4

n=192 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 4(A)

C.Parameter slave 5(A) AS-i 2 4

n=193 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 5(A)

C.Parameter slave 6(A) AS-i 2 4

n=194 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 6(A)

C.Parameter slave 7(A) AS-i 2 4

n=195 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 7(A)

C.Parameter slave 8(A) AS-i 2 4

n=196 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 8(A)

C.Parameter slave 9(A) AS-i 2 4

n=197 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 9(A)

C.Parameter slave 10(A) AS-i 2 4

n=198 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 10(A)

C.Parameter slave 11(A) AS-i 2 4

n=199 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 11(A)

C.Parameter slave 12(A) AS-i 2 4

n=200 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 12(A)

C.Parameter slave 13(A) AS-i 2 4

n=201 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 13(A)

C.Parameter slave 14(A) AS-i 2 4

n=202 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 14(A)

C.Parameter slave 15(A) AS-i 2 4

n=203 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 15(A)

C.Parameter slave 16(A) AS-i 2 4

n=204 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 16(A)

C.Parameter slave 17(A) AS-i 2 4

n=205 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 17(A)

Page 153: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

153

Data points in the configuration assembly

Possible setting values

[hex]

Default values when using EDS

file

Description

with EDS without EDS

AC1421 AC1422

C.Parameter slave 18(A) AS-i 2 4

n=206 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 18(A)

C.Parameter slave 19(A) AS-i 2 4

n=207 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 19(A)

C.Parameter slave 20(A) AS-i 2 4

n=208 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 20(A)

C.Parameter slave 21(A) AS-i 2 4

n=209 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 21(A)

C.Parameter slave 22(A) AS-i 2 4

n=210 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 22(A)

C.Parameter slave 23(A) AS-i 2 4

n=211 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 23(A)

C.Parameter slave 24(A) AS-i 2 4

n=212 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 24(A)

C.Parameter slave 25(A) AS-i 2 4

n=213 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 25(A)

C.Parameter slave 26(A) AS-i 2 4

n=214 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 26(A)

C.Parameter slave 27(A) AS-i 2 4

n=215 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 27(A)

C.Parameter slave 28(A) AS-i 2 4

n=216 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 28(A)

C.Parameter slave 29(A) AS-i 2 4

n=217 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 29(A)

C.Parameter slave 30(A) AS-i 2 4

n=218 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 30(A)

C.Parameter slave 31(A) AS-i 2 4

n=219 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 31(A)

C.Parameter slave 1B AS-i 2 4

n=220 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 1B

C.Parameter slave 2B AS-i 2 4

n=221 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 2B

C.Parameter slave 3B AS-i 2 4

n=222 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 3B

C.Parameter slave 4B AS-i 2 4

n=223 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 4B

C.Parameter slave 5B AS-i 2 4

n=224 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 5B

C.Parameter slave 6B AS-i 2 4

n=225 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 6B

C.Parameter slave 7B AS-i 2 4

n=226 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 7B

C.Parameter slave 8B AS-i 2 4

n=227 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 8B

C.Parameter slave 9B AS-i 2 4

n=228 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 9B

C.Parameter slave 10B AS-i 2 4

n=229 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 10B

Page 154: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

154

Data points in the configuration assembly

Possible setting values

[hex]

Default values when using EDS

file

Description

with EDS without EDS

AC1421 AC1422

C.Parameter slave 11B AS-i 2 4

n=230 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 11B

C.Parameter slave 12B AS-i 2 4

n=231 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 12B

C.Parameter slave 13B AS-i 2 4

n=232 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 13B

C.Parameter slave 14B AS-i 2 4

n=233 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 14B

C.Parameter slave 15B AS-i 2 4

n=234 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 15B

C.Parameter slave 16B AS-i 2 4

n=235 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 16B

C.Parameter slave 17B AS-i 2 4

n=236 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 17B

C.Parameter slave 18B AS-i 2 4

n=237 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 18B

C.Parameter slave 19B AS-i 2 4

n=238 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 19B

C.Parameter slave 20B AS-i 2 4

n=239 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 20B

C.Parameter slave 21B AS-i 2 4

n=240 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 21B

C.Parameter slave 22B AS-i 2 4

n=241 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 22B

C.Parameter slave 23B AS-i 2 4

n=242 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 23B

C.Parameter slave 24B AS-i 2 4

n=243 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 24B

C.Parameter slave 25B AS-i 2 4

n=244 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 25B

C.Parameter slave 26B AS-i 2 4

n=245 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 26B

C.Parameter slave 27B AS-i 2 4

n=246 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 27B

C.Parameter slave 28B AS-i 2 4

n=247 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 28B

C.Parameter slave 29B AS-i 2 4

n=248 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 29B

C.Parameter slave 30B AS-i 2 4

n=249 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 30B

C.Parameter slave 31B AS-i 2 4

n=250 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 2 slave 31B

Legend:

1 = Free slave assignment only possible in top-down mode. 2 = Parameter can only be set if [C.analogue IN order] = 01 and [C.Analogue channels IN] = 4 channels 3 = Parameter can only be set if [C.analogue OUT order] = 01 and [C.Analogue channels OUT] = 4 channels 4 = Parameter can only be set if [C.AS-i param. download] = 01

Page 155: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

155

>

Parameters of the fieldbus slots 41803

NOTICE! For the transmission of cyclic process data between the device and the EtherNet/IP PLC, a limited number of data words is available for each direction of transmission:

Input data (= modules 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 10, 13, 14): 248 words

Output data (= modules 2, 4, 6, 8, 11, 12, 15): 248 words

If the EtherNet/IP modules have been parameterised in such a way that the cyclic input and output data comprise more than 248 words per direction of transmission, any data from the 249th word will not be transmitted and will therefore be lost.

> Risk of data loss.

► Parameterise the EtherNet/IP modules in a way to ensure that the input and output data do not exceed the maximum number of words to be transmitted.

Slot

[dec]

Data points in the configuration

assembly

Possible setting values [hex]

Default values when using EDS

file

Description

with EDS

without EDS

n+3 n+2 n+1 n AC1421 AC1422

1 C.Slot1 n=0 00 00 00 00 Empty module

00 00 10 02 1: digital IN AS-i 1, Slaves 01(A) ... 03(A)

00 00 10 04 1: digital IN AS-i 1, Slaves 01(A) ... 07(A)

00 00 10 06 1: digital IN AS-i 1, Slaves 01(A) ... 11(A)

00 00 10 08 1: digital IN AS-i 1, Slaves 01(A) ... 15(A)

00 00 10 0A 1: digital IN AS-i 1, Slaves 01(A) ... 19(A)

00 00 10 0C 1: digital IN AS-i 1, Slaves 01(A) ... 23(A)

00 00 10 0E 1: digital IN AS-i 1, Slaves 01(A) ... 27(A)

00 00 10 10 X X 1: digital IN AS-i 1, Slaves 01(A) ... 31(A)

2 C.Slot2 n=4 00 00 00 00 Empty module

00 00 20 02 2: digital OUT AS-i 1, Slaves 01(A) ... 03(A)

00 00 20 04 2: digital OUT AS-i 1, Slaves 01(A) ... 07(A)

00 00 20 06 2: digital OUT AS-i 1, Slaves 01(A) ... 11(A)

00 00 20 08 2: digital OUT AS-i 1, Slaves 01(A) ... 15(A)

00 00 20 0A 2: digital OUT AS-i 1, Slaves 01(A) ... 19(A)

00 00 20 0C 2: digital OUT AS-i 1, Slaves 01(A) ... 23(A)

00 00 20 0E 2: digital OUT AS-i 1, Slaves 01(A) ... 27(A)

00 00 20 10 X X 2: digital OUT AS-i 1, Slaves 01(A) ... 31(A)

3 C.Slot3 n=8 00 00 00 00 X Empty module

00 02 10 02 3: digital IN AS-i 2, Slaves 01(A) ... 03(A)

00 02 10 04 3: digital IN AS-i 2, Slaves 01(A) ... 07(A)

00 02 10 06 3: digital IN AS-i 2, Slaves 01(A) ... 11(A)

00 02 10 08 3: digital IN AS-i 2, Slaves 01(A) ... 15(A)

00 02 10 0A 3: digital IN AS-i 2, Slaves 01(A) ... 19(A)

Page 156: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

156

Slot

[dec]

Data points in the configuration

assembly

Possible setting values [hex]

Default values when using EDS

file

Description

with EDS

without EDS

n+3 n+2 n+1 n AC1421 AC1422

00 02 10 0C 3: digital IN AS-i 2, Slaves 01(A) ... 23(A)

00 02 10 0E 3: digital IN AS-i 2, Slaves 01(A) ... 27(A)

00 02 10 10 X 3: digital IN AS-i 2, Slaves 01(A) ... 31(A)

4 C.Slot4 n=12 00 00 00 00 X Empty module

00 02 20 02 4: digital OUT AS-i 2, Slaves 01(A) ... 03(A)

00 02 20 04 4: digital OUT AS-i 2, Slaves 01(A) ... 07(A)

00 02 20 06 4: digital OUT AS-i 2, Slaves 01(A) ... 11(A)

00 02 20 08 4: digital OUT AS-i 2, Slaves 01(A) ... 15(A)

00 02 20 0A 4: digital OUT AS-i 2, Slaves 01(A) ... 19(A)

00 02 20 0C 4: digital OUT AS-i 2, Slaves 01(A) ... 23(A)

00 02 20 0E 4: digital OUT AS-i 2, Slaves 01(A) ... 27(A)

00 02 20 10 X 4: digital OUT AS-i 2, Slaves 01(A) ... 31(A)

5 C.Slot5 n=16 00 00 00 00 Empty module

00 01 10 02 5: digital IN AS-i 1, Slaves 01B ... 03B

00 01 10 04 5: digital IN AS-i 1, Slaves 01B ... 07B

00 01 10 06 5: digital IN AS-i 1, Slaves 01B ... 11B

00 01 10 08 5: digital IN AS-i 1, Slaves 01B ... 15B

00 01 10 0A 5: digital IN AS-i 1, Slaves 01B ... 19B

00 01 10 0C 5: digital IN AS-i 1, Slaves 01B ... 23B

00 01 10 0E 5: digital IN AS-i 1, Slaves 01B ... 27B

00 01 10 10 X X 5: digital IN AS-i 1, Slaves 01B ... 31B

6 C.Slot6 n=20 00 00 00 00 Empty module

00 01 20 02 6: digital OUT AS-i 1, Slaves 01B ... 03B

00 01 20 04 6: digital OUT AS-i 1, Slaves 01B ... 07B

00 01 20 06 6: digital OUT AS-i 1, Slaves 01B ... 11B

00 01 20 08 6: digital OUT AS-i 1, Slaves 01B ... 15B

00 01 20 0A 6: digital OUT AS-i 1, Slaves 01B ... 19B

00 01 20 0C 6: digital OUT AS-i 1, Slaves 01B ... 23B

00 01 20 0E 6: digital OUT AS-i 1, Slaves 01B ... 27B

00 01 20 10 X X 6: digital OUT AS-i 1, Slaves 01B ... 31B

7 C.Slot7 n=24 00 00 00 00 X Empty module

00 03 10 02 7: digital IN AS-i 2, Slaves 01B ... 03B

00 03 10 04 7: digital IN AS-i 2, Slaves 01B ... 07B

00 03 10 06 7: digital IN AS-i 2, Slaves 01B ... 11B

00 03 10 08 7: digital IN AS-i 2, Slaves 01B ... 15B

00 03 10 0A 7: digital IN AS-i 2, Slaves 01B ... 19B

Page 157: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

157

Slot

[dec]

Data points in the configuration

assembly

Possible setting values [hex]

Default values when using EDS

file

Description

with EDS

without EDS

n+3 n+2 n+1 n AC1421 AC1422

00 03 10 0C 7: digital IN AS-i 2, Slaves 01B ... 23B

00 03 10 0E 7: digital IN AS-i 2, Slaves 01B ... 27B

00 03 10 10 X 7: digital IN AS-i 2, Slaves 01B ... 31B

8 C.Slot8 n=28 00 00 00 00 X Empty module

00 03 20 02 8: digital OUT AS-i 2, Slaves 01B ... 03B

00 03 20 04 8: digital OUT AS-i 2, Slaves 01B ... 07B

00 03 20 06 8: digital OUT AS-i 2, Slaves 01B ... 11B

00 03 20 08 8: digital OUT AS-i 2, Slaves 01B ... 15B

00 03 20 0A 8: digital OUT AS-i 2, Slaves 01B ... 19B

00 03 20 0C 8: digital OUT AS-i 2, Slaves 01B ... 23B

00 03 20 0E 8: digital OUT AS-i 2, Slaves 01B ... 27B

00 03 20 10 X 8: digital OUT AS-i 2, Slaves 01B ... 31B

9 C.Slot9 n=32 00 00 00 00 Empty module

00 00 50 08 9: analog IN range 1, 04 words

00 00 50 10 9: analog IN range 1, 08 words

00 00 50 18 9: analog IN range 1, 12 words

00 00 50 20 9: analog IN range 1, 16 words

00 00 50 28 9: analog IN range 1, 20 words

00 00 50 30 9: analog IN range 1, 24 words

00 00 50 38 9: analog IN range 1, 28 words

00 00 50 40 9: analog IN range 1, 32 words

00 00 50 48 9: analog IN range 1, 36 words

00 00 50 50 9: analog IN range 1, 40 words

00 00 50 58 9: analog IN range 1, 44 words

00 00 50 60 9: analog IN range 1, 48 words

00 00 50 68 9: analog IN range 1, 52 words

00 00 50 70 9: analog IN range 1, 56 words

00 00 50 78 X X 9: analog IN range 1, 60 words

10 C.Slot10 n=36 00 00 00 00 X Empty module

00 00 50 08 10: analog IN range 2, 04 words

00 00 50 10 10: analog IN range 2, 08 words

00 00 50 18 10: analog IN range 2, 12 words

00 00 50 20 10: analog IN range 2, 16 words

00 00 50 28 10: analog IN range 2, 20 words

00 00 50 30 10: analog IN range 2, 24 words

00 00 50 38 10: analog IN range 2, 28 words

Page 158: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

158

Slot

[dec]

Data points in the configuration

assembly

Possible setting values [hex]

Default values when using EDS

file

Description

with EDS

without EDS

n+3 n+2 n+1 n AC1421 AC1422

00 00 50 40 10: analog IN range 2, 32 words

00 00 50 48 10: analog IN range 2, 36 words

00 00 50 50 10: analog IN range 2, 40 words

00 00 50 58 10: analog IN range 2, 44 words

00 00 50 60 10: analog IN range 2, 48 words

00 00 50 68 10: analog IN range 2, 52 words

00 00 50 70 10: analog IN range 2, 56 words

00 00 50 78 X 10: analog IN range 2, 60 words

11 C.Slot11 n=40 00 00 00 00 Empty module

00 00 60 08 11: analog OUT range 1, 04 words

00 00 60 10 11: analog OUT range 1, 08 words

00 00 60 18 11: analog OUT range 1, 12 words

00 00 60 20 11: analog OUT range 1, 16 words

00 00 60 28 11: analog OUT range 1, 20 words

00 00 60 30 11: analog OUT range 1, 24 words

00 00 60 38 11: analog OUT range 1, 28 words

00 00 60 40 11: analog OUT range 1, 32 words

00 00 60 48 11: analog OUT range 1, 36 words

00 00 60 50 11: analog OUT range 1, 40 words

00 00 60 58 11: analog OUT range 1, 44 words

00 00 60 60 11: analog OUT range 1, 48 words

00 00 60 68 11: analog OUT range 1, 52 words

00 00 60 70 11: analog OUT range 1, 56 words

00 00 60 78 X X 11: analog OUT range 1, 60 words

12 C.Slot12 n=44 00 00 00 00 X Empty module

00 00 60 08 12: analog OUT range 2, 04 words

00 00 60 10 12: analog OUT range 2, 08 words

00 00 60 18 12: analog OUT range 2, 12 words

00 00 60 20 12: analog OUT range 2, 16 words

00 00 60 28 12: analog OUT range 2, 20 words

00 00 60 30 12: analog OUT range 2, 24 words

00 00 60 38 12: analog OUT range 2, 28 words

00 00 60 40 12: analog OUT range 2, 32 words

00 00 60 48 12: analog OUT range 2, 36 words

00 00 60 50 12: analog OUT range 2, 40 words

00 00 60 58 12: analog OUT range 2, 44 words

00 00 60 60 12: analog OUT range 2, 48 words

00 00 60 68 12: analog OUT range 2, 52 words

Page 159: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

159

Slot

[dec]

Data points in the configuration

assembly

Possible setting values [hex]

Default values when using EDS

file

Description

with EDS

without EDS

n+3 n+2 n+1 n AC1421 AC1422

00 00 60 70 12: analog OUT range 2, 56 words

00 00 60 78 X 12: analog OUT range 2, 60 words

13 C.Slot13 n=48 00 00 00 00 Empty module

00 00 D0 32 X 13: AC1421 (25 words)

00 02 D0 64 X 13: AC1422 (50 words)

00 00 D0 1A 13: AC13x7 AS-i 1 (13 words)

00 02 D0 34 13: AC13x7 AS-i 1+2 (26 words)

14 C.Slot14 n=52 00 00 00 00 X X Empty module

00 04 10 08 14: Inputs from AC142n-PLC, 4 words

00 04 10 10 14: Inputs from AC142n-PLC, 8 words

00 04 10 18 14: Inputs from AC142n-PLC, 12 words

00 04 10 20 14: Inputs from AC142n-PLC, 16 words

00 04 10 28 14: Inputs from AC142n-PLC, 20 words

00 04 10 30 14: Inputs from AC142n-PLC, 24 words

00 04 10 38 14: Inputs from AC142n-PLC, 28 words

00 04 10 40 14: Inputs from AC142n-PLC, 32 words

00 04 10 48 14: Inputs from AC142n-PLC, 36 words

00 04 10 50 14: Inputs from AC142n-PLC, 40 words

00 04 10 58 14: Inputs from AC142n-PLC, 44 words

00 04 10 60 14: Inputs from AC142n-PLC, 48 words

00 04 10 68 14: Inputs from AC142n-PLC, 52 words

00 04 10 70 14: Inputs from AC142n-PLC, 56 words

00 04 10 78 14: Inputs from AC142n-PLC, 60 words

00 04 10 98 14: Inputs from AC142n-PLC, 76 words

00 04 10 B8 14: Inputs from AC142n-PLC, 92 words

00 04 10 D8 14: Inputs from AC142n-PLC, 108 words

00 04 10 F0 14: Inputs from AC142n-PLC, 120 words

15 C.Slot15 n=56 00 00 00 00 X X Empty module

00 04 20 08 15: Outputs to AC142n-PLC, 4 words

Page 160: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

160

Slot

[dec]

Data points in the configuration

assembly

Possible setting values [hex]

Default values when using EDS

file

Description

with EDS

without EDS

n+3 n+2 n+1 n AC1421 AC1422

00 04 20 10 15: Outputs to AC142n-PLC, 8 words

00 04 20 18 15: Outputs to AC142n-PLC, 12 words

00 04 20 20 15: Outputs to AC142n-PLC, 16 words

00 04 20 28 15: Outputs to AC142n-PLC, 20 words

00 04 20 30 15: Outputs to AC142n-PLC, 24 words

00 04 20 38 15: Outputs to AC142n-PLC, 28 words

00 04 20 40 15: Outputs to AC142n-PLC, 32 words

00 04 20 48 15: Outputs to AC142n-PLC, 36 words

00 04 20 50 15: Outputs to AC142n-PLC, 40 words

00 04 20 58 15: Outputs to AC142n-PLC, 44 words

00 04 20 60 15: Outputs to AC142n-PLC, 48 words

00 04 20 68 15: Outputs to AC142n-PLC, 52 words

00 04 20 70 15: Outputs to AC142n-PLC, 56 words

00 04 20 78 15: Outputs to AC142n-PLC, 60 words

00 04 20 98 15: Outputs to AC142n-PLC, 76 words

00 04 20 B8 15: Outputs to AC142n-PLC, 92 words

00 04 20 D8 15: Outputs to AC142n-PLC, 108 words

00 04 20 F0 15: Outputs to AC142n-PLC, 120 words

Page 161: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

161

>

Derivation of parameter values for free slave assignment 41587

The following table shows the derivation of parameter values for a free assignment of slaves within the analogue areas.

A free assignment of analogue slaves in slots 9...12 can only be applied if the parameters [C.Analogue channels IN] and [C.Analogue channels OUT] are set to the value 4 channels!

Byte

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

AS-i 2 AS-i 1 Reserved Slave address (1...31)

Legend:

Master: AS-i Master 1 = 0x40

AS-i Master 2 = 0x80

Slave: Slave 1 = 0x01 ...

Slave 31 = 0x1F

Derivation: byte value = master + slave (→ Examples (→ S. 161))

>

Examples 41497

Byte

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

1 0 0 0x02

= 0x82 = AS-i master 2, slave 2

0 1 0 0x1F

= 0x5F = AS-i master 1, slave 31

>

EDS-file 41503

The EDS file (Electronic Data Sheet)is used to easily integrate the AC1421/22 in a fieldbus projecting software. The EDS supplies a profile of the fieldbus device in form of an ASCII file. It describes all features of the device such as communication parameters and objects.

The EDS file is saved in the device. It can be downloaded directly to the configuration PC via the web interface (→Download the device and I/O description (→ S. 88)).

Page 162: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

162

>

8.7.4 Cyclic data 41571

The cyclic process data are updated through the fieldbus mechanisms at regular intervals. They belong to the category of implicit messaging (→ Implicit Messaging) and are therefore real-time capable.

Slots combine the process data of several AS-i slaves. The following tables show the available EtherNet/IP modules.

The user must set the content and length of the cyclically transmitted data either at the device (→ Configuration mode: Independent (→ S. 197)) or in the EtherNet/IP projection software by means the configuration assembly object (→ Configuration mode: Top-Down (→ S. 196), → Parameter setting via the configuration assembly object (→ S. 145)).

Page 163: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

163

>

Overview: EtherNet/IP modules 41727

NOTICE! For the transmission of cyclic process data between the device and the EtherNet/IP PLC, a limited number of data words is available for each direction of transmission:

Input data (= modules 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 10, 13, 14): 248 words

Output data (= modules 2, 4, 6, 8, 11, 12, 15): 248 words

If the EtherNet/IP modules have been parameterised in such a way that the cyclic input and output data comprise more than 248 words per direction of transmission, any data from the 249th word will not be transmitted and will therefore be lost.

> Risk of data loss.

► Parameterise the EtherNet/IP modules in a way to ensure that the input and output data do not exceed the maximum number of words to be transmitted.

Slot

Description Further information

1 Digital input data single or A slaves, AS-i master 1 → Slot 1 – Digital input data single or A slaves, AS-i master 1 (→ S. 164)

2 Digital output data single or A slaves, AS-i master 1 → Slot 2 – Digital output data single or A slaves, AS-i master 1 (→ S. 164)

3 Digital input data single or A slaves, AS-i master 2

(only available for devices with 2 AS-i masters)

→ Slot 3 – Digital input data single or A slaves, AS-i master 2 (→ S. 165)

4 Digital output data single or A slaves, AS-i master 2

(only available for devices with 2 AS-i masters)

→ Slot 4 – Digital output data single or A slaves, AS-i master 2 (→ S. 165)

5 Digital input data B slaves, AS-i master 1 → Slot 5 – Digital input data B slaves, AS-i master 1 (→ S. 166)

6 Digital output data B slaves, AS-i master 1 → Slot 6 – Digital output data B slaves, AS-i master 1 (→ S. 166)

7 Digital input data B slaves, AS-i master 2

(only available for devices with 2 AS-i masters)

→ Slot 7 – Digital input data B slaves, AS-i master 2 (→ S. 167)

8 Digital output data B slaves, AS-i master 2

(only available for devices with 2 AS-i masters)

→ Slot 8 – Digital output data B slaves, AS-i master 2 (→ S. 167)

9 Analogue input data of up to 31 slaves, range 1* → Slot 9 – Analogue input data (→ S. 170)

10 Analogue input data of up to 31 slaves, range 2* → Slot 10 – Analogue input data (→ S. 171)

11 Analogue output data of up to 31 slaves, range 1** → Slot 11 – Analogue output data (→ S. 172)

12 Analogue output data of up to 31 slaves, range 2** → Slot 12 – Analogue output data (→ S. 173)

13 Diagnostic data → Slot 13 – Diagnostic data (→ S. 178)

14 Data from the device-internal PLC to the EtherNet/IP PLC

→ Slot 14 – Inputs from PLC (→ S. 184)

15 Data from the EtherNet/IP PLC to the device-internal PLC

→ Slot 15 – Outputs to PLC (→ S. 185)

* ... Define the number of analogue channels and the slave number by means of the device parameters [analogue channels/I-slave] (→ Device-specific parameters (→ S. 142)).

** ... Define the number of analogue channels and the slave number by means of the device parameters [analogue channels/O-slave] (→ Device-specific parameters (→ S. 142)).

>

Page 164: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

164

Slot 1 – Digital input data single or A slaves, AS-i master 1 41657

Slot

Description Value range Length [words]

1 Digital input data of single or A slaves, connected to AS-i master 1

Empty module = Module is disabled 0

01 ... 03 = Module is active with slaves 1(A) ... 3(A), AS-i Master 1 1

01 ... 07 = Module is active with slaves 1(A) ... 7(A), AS-i Master 1 2

01 ... 11 = Module is active with slaves 1(A) ... 11(A), AS-i Master 1 3

01 ... 15 = Module is active with slaves 1(A) ... 15(A), AS-i Master 1 4

01 ... 19 = Module is active with slaves 1(A) ... 19(A), AS-i Master 1 5

01 ... 23 = Module is active with slaves 1(A) ... 23(A), AS-i Master 1 6

01 ... 27 = Module is active with slaves 1(A) ...27(A), AS-i Master 1 7

01 ... 31 = Module is active with slaves 1(A) ... 31(A), AS-i Master 1 8

Mapping of the digital input/output data: → Mapping of the digital input/output data (→ S. 168) >

Slot 2 – Digital output data single or A slaves, AS-i master 1 41621

Slot

Description Value range Length [words]

2 Digital output data of single or A slaves, connected to AS-i master 1

Empty module = Module is disabled 0

01 ... 03 = Module is active with slaves 1(A) ... 3(A), AS-i Master 1 1

01 ... 07 = Module is active with slaves 1(A) ... 7(A), AS-i Master 1 2

01 ... 11 = Module is active with slaves 1(A) ... 11(A), AS-i Master 1 3

01 ... 15 = Module is active with slaves 1(A) ... 15(A), AS-i Master 1 4

01 ... 19 = Module is active with slaves 1(A) ... 19(A), AS-i Master 1 5

01 ... 23 = Module is active with slaves 1(A) ... 23(A), AS-i Master 1 6

01 ... 27 = Module is active with slaves 1(A) ...27(A), AS-i Master 1 7

01 ... 31 = Module is active with slaves 1(A) ... 31(A), AS-i Master 1 8

Mapping of the digital input/output data: → Mapping of the digital input/output data (→ S. 168)

Page 165: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

165

>

Slot 3 – Digital input data single or A slaves, AS-i master 2 41620

Slot

Description Value range Length [words]

3 Digital input data of single or A slaves, connected to AS-i master 2 (only available for devices with 2 AS-i masters)

Empty module = Module is disabled 0

01 ... 03 = Module is active with slaves 1(A) ... 3(A), AS-i Master 2 1

01 ... 07 = Module is active with slaves 1(A) ... 7(A), AS-i Master 2 2

01 ... 11 = Module is active with slaves 1(A) ... 11(A), AS-i Master 2 3

01 ... 15 = Module is active with slaves 1(A) ... 15(A), AS-i Master 2 4

01 ... 19 = Module is active with slaves 1(A) ... 19(A), AS-i Master 2 5

01 ... 23 = Module is active with slaves 1(A) ... 23(A), AS-i Master 2 6

01 ... 27 = Module is active with slaves 1(A) ...27(A), AS-i Master 2 7

01 ... 31 = Module is active with slaves 1(A) ... 31(A), AS-i Master 2 8

Mapping of the digital input/output data: → Mapping of the digital input/output data (→ S. 168) >

Slot 4 – Digital output data single or A slaves, AS-i master 2 41635

Slot

Description Value range Length [words]

4 Digital output data of single or A slaves, connected to AS-i master 2 (only available for devices with 2 AS-i masters)

Empty module = Module is disabled 0

01 ... 03 = Module is active with slaves 1(A) ... 3(A), AS-i Master 2 1

01 ... 07 = Module is active with slaves 1(A) ... 7(A), AS-i Master 2 2

01 ... 11 = Module is active with slaves 1(A) ... 11(A), AS-i Master 2 3

01 ... 15 = Module is active with slaves 1(A) ... 15(A), AS-i Master 2 4

01 ... 19 = Module is active with slaves 1(A) ... 19(A), AS-i Master 2 5

01 ... 23 = Module is active with slaves 1(A) ... 23(A), AS-i Master 2 6

01 ... 27 = Module is active with slaves 1(A) ...27(A), AS-i Master 2 7

01 ... 31 = Module is active with slaves 1(A) ... 31(A), AS-i Master 2 8

Mapping of the digital input/output data: → Mapping of the digital input/output data (→ S. 168)

Page 166: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

166

>

Slot 5 – Digital input data B slaves, AS-i master 1 41638

Slot

Description Value range Length [words]

5 Digital input data of B slaves, connected to AS-i master 1

Empty module = Module is disabled 0

01B ... 03B = Module is active with slaves 1B ... 3B, AS-i Master 1 1

01B ... 07B = Module is active with slaves 1B ... 7B, AS-i Master 1 2

01B ... 11B = Module is active with slaves 1B ... 11B, AS-i Master 1 3

01B ... 15B = Module is active with slaves 1B ... 15B, AS-i Master 1 4

01B ... 19B = Module is active with slaves 1B ... 19B, AS-i Master 1 5

01B ... 23B = Module is active with slaves 1B ... 23B, AS-i Master 1 6

01B ... 27B = Module is active with slaves 1B ... 27B, AS-i Master 1 7

01B ... 31B = Module is active with slaves 1B ... 31B, AS-i Master 1 8

Mapping of the digital input/output data: → Mapping of the digital input/output data (→ S. 168) >

Slot 6 – Digital output data B slaves, AS-i master 1 41629

Slot

Description Value range Length [words]

6 Digital output data of B slaves, connected to AS-i master 1

Empty module = Module is disabled 0

01B ... 03B = Module is active with slaves 1B ... 3B, AS-i Master 1 1

01B ... 07B = Module is active with slaves 1B ... 7B, AS-i Master 1 2

01B ... 11B = Module is active with slaves 1B ... 11B, AS-i Master 1 3

01B ... 15B = Module is active with slaves 1B ... 15B, AS-i Master 1 4

01B ... 19B = Module is active with slaves 1B ... 19B, AS-i Master 1 5

01B ... 23B = Module is active with slaves 1B ... 23B, AS-i Master 1 6

01B ... 27B = Module is active with slaves 1B ... 27B, AS-i Master 1 7

01B ... 31B = Module is active with slaves 1B ... 31B, AS-i Master 1 8

Mapping of the digital input/output data: → Mapping of the digital input/output data (→ S. 168)

Page 167: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

167

>

Slot 7 – Digital input data B slaves, AS-i master 2 41633

Slot

Description Value range Length [words]

7 Digital input data of B slaves, connected to AS-i master 2 (only available for devices with 2 AS-i masters)

Empty module = Module is disabled 0

01B ... 03B = Module is active with slaves 1B ... 3B, AS-i Master 2 1

01B ... 07B = Module is active with slaves 1B ... 7B, AS-i Master 2 2

01B ... 11B = Module is active with slaves 1B ... 11B, AS-i Master 2 3

01B ... 15B = Module is active with slaves 1B ... 15B, AS-i Master 2 4

01B ... 19B = Module is active with slaves 1B ... 19B, AS-i Master 2 5

01B ... 23B = Module is active with slaves 1B ... 23B, AS-i Master 2 6

01B ... 27B = Module is active with slaves 1B ... 27B, AS-i Master 2 7

01B ... 31B = Module is active with slaves 1B ... 31B, AS-i Master 2 8

Mapping of the digital input/output data: → Mapping of the digital input/output data (→ S. 168) >

Slot 8 – Digital output data B slaves, AS-i master 2 41696

Slot

Description Value range Length [words]

8 Digital output data of B slaves, connected to AS-i master 2 (only available for devices with 2 AS-i masters)

Empty module = Module is disabled 0

01B ... 03B = Module is active with slaves 1B ... 3B, AS-i Master 2 1

01B ... 07B = Module is active with slaves 1B ... 7B, AS-i Master 2 2

01B ... 11B = Module is active with slaves 1B ... 11B, AS-i Master 2 3

01B ... 15B = Module is active with slaves 1B ... 15B, AS-i Master 2 4

01B ... 19B = Module is active with slaves 1B ... 19B, AS-i Master 2 5

01B ... 23B = Module is active with slaves 1B ... 23B, AS-i Master 2 6

01B ... 27B = Module is active with slaves 1B ... 27B, AS-i Master 2 7

01B ... 31B = Module is active with slaves 1B ... 31B, AS-i Master 2 8

Mapping of the digital input/output data: → Mapping of the digital input/output data (→ S. 168)

Page 168: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

168

>

Mapping of the digital input/output data 41745

This table illustrates the mapping of digital input/output data of the individual slaves to the bytes of the transmitted words:

Word AS-i slave addresses

Bits 15...12

Bits 11...8

Bits 7...4

Bits 3...0

1 M flags* 1(A) / 1B 2(A) / 2B 3(A) / 3B

2 4(A) / 4B 5(A) / 5B 6(A) / 6B 7(A) / 7B

3 8(A) / 8B 9(A) / 9B 10(A) / 10B 11(A) / 11B

4 12(A) / 12B 13(A) / 13B 14(A) / 14B 15(A) / 15B

5 16(A) / 16B 17(A) / 17B 18(A) / 18B 19(A) / 19B

6 20(A) / 20B 21(A) / 21B 22(A) / 22B 23(A) / 23B

7 24(A) / 24B 25(A) / 25B 26(A) / 26B 27(A) / 27B

8 28(A) / 28B 29(A) / 29B 30(A) / 30B 31(A) / 31B

Legend:

* ... The master flags (M flags) are only transmitted in the digital input data (→ Table: Master flags (→ S. 169)).

>

Example: structure of the digital input data 41498

Task: The digital input data of slaves 1A, 3 and 6A of AS-i master 1 are to be transmitted.

Solution: Slot: 1 Module configuration: 01 ... 07

Data length: 2 words

The following table shows in which positions of the two word sized data block the digital input data of the slaves are transmitted:

Data block (2 words)

Bits 31...28

Bits 27...24

Bits 23...20

Bits 19...16

Bits 15...12

Bits 11...8

Bits 7...4

Bits 3...0

1A 3 6A

Page 169: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

169

>

Table: Master flags 41665

Bits 12...15 of the first word of the digital input data contain the master flags. They provide information on the operating state of the AS-i master. The following table shows the meaning of each bit:

Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12

AS-i power fail (19 V)

Configuration error in the AS-i circuit

AS-i master is offline (AS-i data is invalid)

Periphery fault in the AS-i circuit

Possible values per bit: 0 = no error 1 = error

In the digital output data, bits 12...15 have no relevance and are not evaluated!

Page 170: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

170

>

Slot 9 – Analogue input data 41699

Slot

Description Value range Length [words]

9 Data area with a maximum length of 60 words for cyclic transmission of analogue input information

Default setting: analogue inputs of AS-i slaves 01 ... 15, connected to AS-i master 1

The valid and

overflow flags that each analogue AS-i input slave provides for each channel are NOT represented here. If required, they can be read out via the acyclic services. (→ Acyclic data (→ S. 186)).

Empty module = Module is deactivated 0

004 words = Module is activated with 4 words 4

008 words = Module is activated with 8 words 8

012 words = Module is activated with 12words 12

016 words = Module is activated with 16 words 16

020 words = Module is activated with 20 words 20

024 words = Module is activated with 24 words 24

028 words = Module is activated with 28 words 28

032 words = Module is activated with 32 words 32

036 words = Module is activated with 36 words 36

040 words = Module is activated with 40 words 40

044 words = Module is activated with 44 words 44

048 words = Module is activated with 48 words 48

052 words = Module is activated with 52 words 52

056 words = Module is activated with 56 words 56

060 words = Module is activated with 60 words 60

The exact mapping of analogue input data within this area depends on the parameter setting [Analog. channels/I-slave] (→Configuration of the analogue channels in slots 9 ... 12 (→ S. 174)).

Page 171: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

171

>

Slot 10 – Analogue input data 41655

Slot

Description Value range Length [words]

10 Data area with a maximum length of 60 words for cyclic transmission of analogue input information

Default setting: analogue inputs of AS-i slaves 01.. 15, connected to AS-i master 2 (only available for devices with 2 AS-i masters)

The valid and

overflow flags that each analogue AS-i input slave provides for each channel are NOT represented here. If required, they can be read out via the acyclic services (Explicit Messaging) (→ Acyclic data (→ S. 186)).

Empty module = Module is deactivated 0

004 words = Module is activated with 4 words 4

008 words = Module is activated with 8 words 8

012 words = Module is activated with 12 words 12

016 words = Module is activated with 16 words 16

020 words = Module is activated with 20 words 20

024 words = Module is activated with 24 words 24

028 words = Module is activated with 28 words 28

032 words = Module is activated with 32 words 32

036 words = Module is activated with 36 words 36

040 words =Module is activated with 40 words 40

044 words = Module is activated with 44 words 44

048 words = Module is activated with 48 words 48

052 words = Module is activated with 52 words 52

056 words = Module is activated with 56 words 56

060 words = Module is activated with 60 words 60

The exact mapping of analogue input data within this area depends on the parameter setting [Analog. channels/I-slave] (→Configuration of the analogue channels in slots 9 ... 12 (→ S. 174)).

Page 172: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

172

>

Slot 11 – Analogue output data 41623

Slot

Description Value range Length [words]

11 Data area with a maximum length of 60 words for cyclic transmission of analogue output information.

Default setting: analogue outputs of AS-i slaves 16...30, connected to AS-i master 1

Empty module = Module is deactivated 0

004 words = Module is activated with 4 words 4

008 words = Module is activated with 8 words 8

012 words = Module is activated with 12 words 12

016 words = Module is activated with 16 words 16

020 words = Module is activated with 20 words 20

024 words = Module is activated with 24 words 24

028 words = Module is activated with 28 words 28

032 words = Module is activated with 32 words 32

036 words = Module is activated with 36 words 36

040 words = Module is activated with 40 words 40

044 words = Module is activated with 44 words 44

048 words = Module is activated with 48 words 48

052 words = Module is activated with 52 words 52

056 words = Module is activated with 56 words 56

060 words = Module is activated with 60 words 60

The exact mapping of analogue output data within this area depends on the parameter setting [Analog. channels/O-slave] (→Configuration of the analogue channels in slots 9 ... 12 (→ S. 174)).

Page 173: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

173

>

Slot 12 – Analogue output data 41627

Slot

Description Value range Length [words]

12 Data area with a maximum length of 60 words for cyclic transmission of analogue output information.

Default setting: analogue outputs of AS-i slaves 16...30, connected to AS-i master 2 (only available for devices with 2 AS-i masters)

Empty module = Module is deactivated 0

004 words = Module is activated with 4 words 4

008 words = Module is activated with 8 words 8

012 words = Module is activated with 12 words 12

016 words = Module is activated with 16 words 16

020 words = Module is activated with 20 words 20

024 words = Module is activated with 24 words 24

028 words = Module is activated with 28 words 28

032 words = Module is activated with 32 words 32

036 words = Module is activated with 36 words 36

040 words = Module is activated with 40 words 40

044 words = Module is activated with 44 words 44

048 words = Module is activated with 48 words 48

052 words = Module is activated with 52 words 52

056 words = Module is activated with 56 words 56

060 words = Module is activated with 60 words 60

The exact mapping of analogue output data within this area depends on the parameter setting [Analog. channels/O-slave] (→Configuration of the analogue channels in slots 9 ... 12 (→ S. 174)).

Page 174: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

174

>

Configuration of the analogue channels in slots 9 ... 12 41613

The configuration of the EtherNet/IP device parameters [Analog. channels/I-slave] and [Analog. channels/O-slave] determines which analogue channels of the AS-i slaves are transmitted. The following table shows the meaning of the adjustable parameter values:

Parameter values Description

4 channels Variable slave assignment

The analogue channels of max. 30 slave addresses are transferred:

single slaves: channels 1...4 or: A slaves: channels 1+2 and B slaves: channels 1+2

The device-specific parameters (→ Device-specific parameters (→ S. 146)) of the device allow you to individually define the order of 15 of the analogue slaves to be transferred, respectively (→ Table: variable slave assignment for slots 9 ... 12 (→ S. 177)). All available slave addresses of both AS-i masters can be selected.

Preset, variable:

for slot 9: AS-i master 1: single slaves 1 ... 15 or: slave 1A ... 15A, 1B ... 15B

for slot 10: AS-i master 2: single slaves 1 ... 15 or: slave 1A ... 15A, 1B ... 15B

for slot 11: AS-i master 1: single slaves 16 ... 30 or: slave 16A .... 30A, 15B ... 30B

for slot 12: AS-i master 2: single slaves 16 ... 30 or: slave 16A .... 30A, 15B ... 30B

2 channels Fixed slave assignment

Of each transferring AS-i single and A address, the following analogue channels are transmitted:

of single slaves: channels 1+2 or: of A slaves: channels 1+2

The slave assignment is fixed (→ Table: Fixed slave assignment for slots 9 ... 12 (→ S. 175)). A configuration of the slave order in the device-specific parameters is ineffective.

1 channel Fixed slave assignment

Of each transferring AS-i single and A address, the following analogue channels are transmitted:

single slaves: channel 1 or: A slaves: channel 1

The slave assignment is fixed (→ Table: Fixed slave assignment for slots 9 ... 12 (→ S. 175)). A configuration of the slave order in the device-specific parameters is ineffective.

1 channel A/B-Slave

Fixed slave assignment

Of each transferring slave address, the following analogue channels are transmitted:

single slaves: channels 1+3 or: A slaves: channel 1 and B slaves: channel 1

The slave assignment is fixed (→ Table: Fixed slave assignment for slots 9 ... 12 (→ S. 175)). A configuration of the slave order in the device-specific parameters is ineffective.

Page 175: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

175

>

Table: Fixed slave assignment for slots 9 ... 12 41673

Word Word content for the following number of analogue channels per input/output slave

2 channels 1 channel 1 channel A/B-Slave

1 Mx / slave 1(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 1(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 1(A) / Channel 1

2 Mx / slave 1(A) / Channel 2 Mx / slave 2(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 1B / Channel 1 = Mx / slave 1 / Channel 3

3 Mx / slave 2(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 3(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 2(A) / Channel 1

4 Mx / slave 2(A) / Channel 2 Mx / slave 4(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 2B / Channel 1 = Mx / slave 2 / Channel 3

5 Mx / slave 3(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 5(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 3(A) / Channel 1

6 Mx / slave 3(A) / Channel 2 Mx / slave 6(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 3B / Channel 1 = Mx / slave 3 / Channel 3

7 Mx / slave 4(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 7(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 4(A) / Channel 1 1

8 Mx / slave 4(A) / Channel 2 Mx / slave 8(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 4B / Channel 1 = Mx / slave 4 / Channel 3

9 Mx / slave 5(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 9(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 5(A) / Channel 1

10 Mx / slave 5(A) / Channel 2 Mx / slave 10(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 5B /Channel 1 = Mx / slave 5 / Channel 3

11 Mx / slave 6(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 11(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 6(A) / Channel 1

12 Mx / slave 6(A) / Channel 2 Mx / slave 12(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 6B / Channel 1 = Mx / slave 6 / Channel 3

13 Mx / slave 7(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 13(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 7(A) / Channel 1

14 Mx / slave 7(A) / Channel 2 Mx / slave 14(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 7B / Channel 1 = Mx / slave 7 / Channel 3

15 Mx / slave 8(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 15(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 8(A) / Channel 1

16 Mx / slave 8(A) / Channel 2 Mx / slave 16(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 8B / Channel 1 = Mx / slave 8 / Channel 3

17 Mx / slave 9(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 17(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 9(A) / Channel 1

18 Mx / slave 9(A) / Channel 2 Mx / slave 18(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 9B / Channel 1 = Mx / slave 9 / Channel 3

19 Mx / slave 10(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 19(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 10(A) / Channel 1

20 Mx / slave 10(A) / Channel 2 Mx / slave 20(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 10B / Channel 1 = Mx / slave 10 / Channel

3

21 Mx / slave 11(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 21(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 11(A) / Channel 1

22 Mx / slave 11(A) / Channel 2 Mx / slave 22(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 11B / Channel 1 = Mx / slave 11 / Channel

3

23 Mx / slave 12(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 23(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 12(A) / Channel 1

24 Mx / slave 12(A) / Channel 2 Mx / slave 24(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 12B / Channel 1 = Mx / slave 12 / Channel

3

25 Mx / slave 13(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 25(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 13(A) / Channel 1

26 Mx / slave 13(A) / Channel 2 Mx / slave 26(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 13B / Channel 1 = Mx / slave 13 / Channel

3

27 Mx / slave 14(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 27(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 14(A) / Channel 1

28 Mx / slave 14(A) / Channel 2 Mx / slave 28(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 14B / Channel 1 = Mx / slave 14 / Channel

3

29 Mx / slave 15(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 29(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 15(A) / Channel 1

30 Mx / slave 15(A) / Channel 2 Mx / slave 30(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 15B / Channel 1= Mx / slave 15 / Channel 3

31 Mx / slave 16(A) /Channel 1 Mx / slave 31(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 16(A) / Channel 1

32 Mx / slave 16(A) / Channel 2 Mx / slave 16B / Channel 1 = Mx / slave 16 / Channel

3

33 Mx / slave 17(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 17(A) / Channel 1

34 Mx / slave 17(A) / Channel 2 Mx / slave 17B / Channel 1= Mx / slave 17 / Channel 3

Page 176: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

176

35 Mx / slave 18(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 18(A) / Channel 1

36 Mx / slave 18(A) / Channel 2 Mx / slave 18B / Channel 1 = Mx / slave 18 / Channel

3

37 Mx / slave 19(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 19(A) / Channel 1

38 Mx / slave 19(A) / Channel 2 Mx / slave 19B / Channel 1 = Mx / slave 19 / Channel

3

39 Mx / slave 20(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 20(A) / Channel 1

40 Mx / slave 20(A) / Channel 2 Mx / slave 20B / Channel 1 = Mx / slave 20 / Channel

3

41 Mx / slave 21(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 21(A) / Channel 1

42 Mx / slave 21(A) / Channel 2 Mx / slave 21B / Channel 1 = Mx / slave 21 / Channel

3

43 Mx / slave 22(A) /Channel 1 Mx / slave 22(A) / Channel 1

44 Mx / slave 22(A) / Channel 2 Mx / slave 22B / Channel 1 = Mx / slave 22 / Channel

3

45 Mx / slave 23(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 23(A) / Channel 1

46 Mx / slave 23(A) / Channel 2 Mx / slave 23B / Channel 1 = Mx / slave 23 / Channel

3

47 Mx / slave 24(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 24(A) / Channel 1

48 Mx / slave 24(A) / Channel 2 Mx / slave 24B / Channel 1 = Mx / slave 24 / Channel

3

49 Mx / slave 25(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 25(A) / Channel 1

50 Mx / slave 25(A) / Channel 2 Mx / slave 25B / Channel 1 = Mx / slave 25 / Channel

3

51 Mx / slave 26(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 26(A) / Channel 1

52 Mx / slave 26(A) / Channel 2 Mx / slave 26B / Channel 1 = Mx / slave 26 / Channel

3

53 Mx / slave 27(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 27(A) / Channel 1

54 Mx / slave 27(A) / Channel 2 Mx / slave 27B / Channel 1 = Mx / slave 27 / Channel

3

55 Mx / slave 28(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 28(A) / Channel 1

56 Mx / slave 28(A) / Channel 2 Mx / slave 28B / Channel 1 = Mx / slave 28 / Channel

3

57 Mx / slave 29(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 29(A) / Channel 1

58 Mx / slave 29(A) / Channel 2 Mx / slave 29B / Channel 1 = Mx / slave 29 / Channel

3

59 Mx / slave 30(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 30(A) /Channel 1

60 Mx / slave 30(A) / Channel 2 Mx / slave 30B / Channel 1 = Mx / slave 30 / Channel

3

Legend:

x ... - slot 9 + 11: x=1 (M1 = AS-i master 1) - slot 10 + 12: x=2 (M2 = AS-i master 2)

Page 177: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

177

>

Table: variable slave assignment for slots 9 ... 12 41668

Word offset no.

Content of transmitted word for parameter value 4 channels

n Mx / slave m(A) / channel 1

n+1 Mx / slave m(A) / channel 2

n+2 Mx / slave m(A) / channel 1 = Mx / slave mB / channel 1

n+3 Mx / slave m(A) / channel 2 = Mx / slave mB / channel 2

Legend:

n ... number of 4-word blocks 1 = if 4 words are set ... 15 = if 60 words are set

x ... 1 = AS-i Master 1 2 = AS-i Master 2

m ... numerical part of the selected AS-i slave address

Variable AS-i slave assignment is only possible in top-down mode. In the EtherNet/IP projection software, each word can be assigned the data of an AS-i slave via the configuration assembly object. Otherwise, the preset values apply (→ Configuration of the analogue channels in slots 9 ... 12 (→ S. 174)).

To assign a specific AS-i slave address to the transferring channels:

► Open the project in the EtherNet/IP projection software.

► Make the following settings in the configuration assembly object:

Activate the data point C.Analogue IN order (= 0x01).

Assign the desired slave addresses to the input channels in the data points C.1st analogue IN Slot 9 to

C.15th analogue IN Slot 10.

Activate the data point C. Analogue OUT order (= 0x01).

Assign the desired slave addresses to the output channels in the data points C.1st analogue OUT Slot 11

... C.15th analogue OUT Slot 12 .

► Save the set values and transfer the project to the device (download).

Page 178: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

178

>

Slot 13 – Diagnostic data 41626

Slot Description Value range Data length

[words]

13 Diagnostic data sent to the I/O scanner

Contents of diagnostic data: → following tables

Empty module 0

AC1421 (→ Module setting: AC1421 (→ S. 178)) 25

AC1422 (→ Module setting: AC1422 (→ S. 179)) 50

AC13x7 AS-i 1 (→ Module setting: AC13x7 AS-i 1 (→ S. 179)) 13

AC13x7 AS-i 1+2 (→ Module setting: AC13x7 AS-i 1+2 (→ S. 180))

26

>

Module setting: AC1421 41757

Word Description Details

1 System diagnosis Diagnosis - System diagnosis (→ S. 180)

2...5 AS-i master 1: AS-i diagnosis Diagnosis - AS-i diagnosis (→ S. 181)

6...9 AS-i master 1: list of missing slaves Diagnosis - List of missing slaves (LCMES) (→ S. 182)

10...13 AS-i master 1: List of non-projected slaves Diagnosis - List of non-projected slaves (LCAES) (→ S. 182)

14...17 AS-i master 1: List of slaves with wrong slave profile

Diagnosis - List of slaves with wrong slave profile (LCE) (→ S. 183)

18...21 AS-i master 1: list of peripheral faults Diagnosis - List of peripheral faults (LPF) (→ S. 183)

22...25 AS-i master 1: list of multiple addressed slaves Diagnosis - List of double addressed slaves (LDAS) (→ S. 183)

Page 179: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

179

>

Module setting: AC1422 41750

Words 1 to 25 correspond to those of the module setting AC1421 (→ Module setting: AC1421

(→ S. 178)).

Word Description Details

1 System diagnosis Diagnosis - System diagnosis (→ S. 180)

2...5 AS-i master 1: AS-i diagnosis Diagnosis - AS-i diagnosis (→ S. 181)

6...9 AS-i master 1: list of missing slaves Diagnosis - List of missing slaves (LCMES) (→ S. 182)

10...13 AS-i master 1: List of non-projected slaves Diagnosis - List of non-projected slaves (LCAES) (→ S. 182)

14...17 AS-i master 1: List of slaves with wrong slave profile

Diagnosis - List of slaves with wrong slave profile (LCE) (→ S. 183)

18...21 AS-i master 1: list of peripheral faults Diagnosis - List of peripheral faults (LPF) (→ S. 183)

22...25 AS-i master 1: list of multiple addressed slaves Diagnosis - List of double addressed slaves (LDAS) (→ S. 183)

26...29 AS-i master 2: AS-i diagnosis Diagnosis - AS-i diagnosis (→ S. 181)

30...33 AS-i master 2: list of missing slaves Diagnosis - List of missing slaves (LCMES) (→ S. 182)

34...37 AS-i master 2: List of non-projected slaves Diagnosis - List of non-projected slaves (LCAES) (→ S. 182)

38...41 AS-i master 2: List of slaves with wrong slave profile

Diagnosis - List of slaves with wrong slave profile (LCE) (→ S. 183)

42...45 AS-i master 2: list of peripheral faults Diagnosis - List of peripheral faults (LPF) (→ S. 183)

46...49 AS-i master 2: list of multiple addressed slaves Diagnosis - List of double addressed slaves (LDAS) (→ S. 183)

50 reserved

>

Module setting: AC13x7 AS-i 1 41759

The content of the module setting is compatible with the diagnosis data of the predecessor model AC1327.

Word Description Details

1 AS-i master 1: Master flags Diagnosis - Master flags (→ S. 181)

2...5 AS-i master 1: list of detected slaves (LDS) Diagnosis - List of detected slaves (LDS) (→ S. 182)

6...9 AS-i master 1: configuration error Diagnosis - List of slaves with wrong slave profile (LCE) (→ S. 183)

10...13 AS-i master 1: peripheral fault (LPF) Diagnosis - List of peripheral faults (LPF) (→ S. 183)

Page 180: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

180

>

Module setting: AC13x7 AS-i 1+2 41758

The content of the module setting is compatible with the diagnostic data of the predecessor model AC1337.

Words 1 to 13 correspond to those of the module setting AC13x7 AS-i 1 (→ Module setting: AC13x7 AS-i 1 (→ S. 179)).

Word Description Details

1 AS-i master 1: Master flags Diagnosis - Master flags (→ S. 181)

2...5 AS-i master 1: list of detected slaves Diagnosis - List of detected slaves (LDS) (→ S. 182)

6...9 AS-i master 1: configuration error Diagnosis - List of slaves with wrong slave profile (LCE) (→ S. 183)

10...13 AS-i master 1: peripheral fault Diagnosis - List of peripheral faults (LPF) (→ S. 183)

14 AS-i master 2: Master flags Diagnosis - Master flags (→ S. 181)

15...18 AS-i master 2: list of detected slaves Diagnosis - List of detected slaves (LDS) (→ S. 182)

19...22 AS-i master 1: configuration error Diagnosis - List of slaves with wrong slave profile (LCE) (→ S. 183)

23...26 AS-i master 1: peripheral fault (LPF) Diagnosis - List of peripheral faults (LPF) (→ S. 183)

>

Details of the diagnosis area 41581

>

Diagnosis - System diagnosis 41448

Offset Word no.

Bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

n - - - - - - - - - - - - PS GI OT ISE

Legend:

Flag Description

ISE Internal System Error Interner Systemfehler

OT over temperature: temperature inside the device has exceeded the permissible max. temperature value

GI gateway inactive: the gateway mode was deactivated

PS PLC stop: The controller was stopped

Page 181: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

181

>

Diagnosis - AS-i diagnosis 41466

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

n - - PF19 PF22.5 EF S0 PM IME - - - DAE PE CEIP CEAS CEMS

n+1 Voltage AS-i+ to AS-i- in mV

n+2 Voltage FE to AS-i- in mV

n+3 Symmetry in % (-100% ... +100%)

Legend:

Flag Description

IME internal master error: Internal system error of an AS-i master

PM projection mode: AS-i master was set to the projection mode.

S0 slave 0 detected: New slave 0 was detected.

EF earth fault: Earth fault was detected

PF22.5 22.5V AS-i Power-Fail (classic AS-i Power) was detected.

PF19 19 AS-i Power-Fail (Power24) was detected.

CEMS Configuration Error – Missing Slave: AS-i configuration error, one or several slaves are projected, but not available.

CEAS Configuration Error – Additional Slave: AS-i configuration error, one or several slaves are available, but not projected.

CEIP Configuration Error – Invalid Profile: AS-i configuration error, the slave profiles of one or several slaves differ from the projected slave profiles.

PE periphery error: One or several AS-i slaves have a periphery error.

DAE duplicate address error: One or several multiple-addressing faults occurred.

>

Diagnosis - Master flags 41446

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

n - - - - - - - - - CNOT - PNOT PF LDS0 CACT -

Legend:

Flag Description

CACT Configuration Active: AS-i master is in the projection mode.

LDS0 LDS.0: A single slave with the address 0 was detected

PF AS-i_Power_Fail: AS-i voltage too low

PNOT NOT Periphery_OK: periphery fault

CNOT NOT Configuartion_OK: configuration error

- reserved >

Page 182: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

182

>

Diagnosis - List of detected slaves (LDS) 41452

Offset Word no.

Bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

n 15(A) 14(A) 13(A) 12(A) 11(A) 10(A) 9(A) 8(A) 7(A) 6(A) 5(A) 4(A) 3(A) 2(A) 1(A) 0

n+1 31(A) 30(A) 29(A) 28(A) 27(A) 26(A) 25(A) 24(A) 23(A) 22(A) 21(A) 20(A) 19(A) 18(A) 17(A) 16(A)

n+2 15B 14B 13B 12B 11B 10B 9B 8B 7B 6B 5B 4B 3B 2B 1B n.a.

n+3 31B 30B 29B 28B 27B 26B 25B 24B 23B 22B 21B 20B 19B 18B 17B 16B

Possible value of slave fields:

0 ... no slave detected 1.... slave detected

>

Diagnosis - List of missing slaves (LCMES) 41453

Offset Word no.

Bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

n 15(A) 14(A) 13(A) 12(A) 11(A) 10(A) 9(A) 8(A) 7(A) 6(A) 5(A) 4(A) 3(A) 2(A) 1(A) 0

n+1 31(A) 30(A) 29(A) 28(A) 27(A) 26(A) 25(A) 24(A) 23(A) 22(A) 21(A) 20(A) 19(A) 18(A) 17(A) 16(A)

n+2 15B 14B 13B 12B 11B 10B 9B 8B 7B 6B 5B 4B 3B 2B 1B n.a.

n+3 31B 30B 29B 28B 27B 26B 25B 24B 23B 22B 21B 20B 19B 18B 17B 16B

Possible values of slave fields:

0 ... no error 1.... slave is projected, but is missing

If at least 1 bit is set in this list, the bit for CEMS is also set. (→Diagnosis - AS-i diagnosis (→ S. 181))

>

Diagnosis - List of non-projected slaves (LCAES) 41455

Offset Word no.

Bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

n 15(A) 14(A) 13(A) 12(A) 11(A) 10(A) 9(A) 8(A) 7(A) 6(A) 5(A) 4(A) 3(A) 2(A) 1(A) 0

n+1 31(A) 30(A) 29(A) 28(A) 27(A) 26(A) 25(A) 24(A) 23(A) 22(A) 21(A) 20(A) 19(A) 18(A) 17(A) 16(A)

n+2 15B 14B 13B 12B 11B 10B 9B 8B 7B 6B 5B 4B 3B 2B 1B n.a.

n+3 31B 30B 29B 28B 27B 26B 25B 24B 23B 22B 21B 20B 19B 18B 17B 16B

Possible values of slave fields:

0 ... no error 1.... slave is detected, but not yet projected

If at least 1 bit is set in this list, the bit for CEAS is also set. (→Diagnosis - AS-i diagnosis (→ S. 181))

>

Page 183: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

183

Diagnosis - List of slaves with wrong slave profile (LCE) 41447

Offset Word no.

Bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

n 15(A) 14(A) 13(A) 12(A) 11(A) 10(A) 9(A) 8(A) 7(A) 6(A) 5(A) 4(A) 3(A) 2(A) 1(A) 0

n+1 31(A) 30(A) 29(A) 28(A) 27(A) 26(A) 25(A) 24(A) 23(A) 22(A) 21(A) 20(A) 19(A) 18(A) 17(A) 16(A)

n+2 15B 14B 13B 12B 11B 10B 9B 8B 7B 6B 5B 4B 3B 2B 1B n.a.

n+3 31B 30B 29B 28B 27B 26B 25B 24B 23B 22B 21B 20B 19B 18B 17B 16B

Possible values of slave fields:

0 ... no error 1.... Slave is detected, but has wrong profile

If at least 1 bit is set in this list, the bit for CEIP is also set. (→Diagnosis - AS-i diagnosis (→ S. 181))

>

Diagnosis - List of peripheral faults (LPF) 41454

Offset Word no.

Bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

n 15(A) 14(A) 13(A) 12(A) 11(A) 10(A) 9(A) 8(A) 7(A) 6(A) 5(A) 4(A) 3(A) 2(A) 1(A) 0

n+1 31(A) 30(A) 29(A) 28(A) 27(A) 26(A) 25(A) 24(A) 23(A) 22(A) 21(A) 20(A) 19(A) 18(A) 17(A) 16(A)

n+2 15B 14B 13B 12B 11B 10B 9B 8B 7B 6B 5B 4B 3B 2B 1B n.a.

n+3 31B 30B 29B 28B 27B 26B 25B 24B 23B 22B 21B 20B 19B 18B 17B 16B

Possible values of slave fields:

0 ... no error 1.... peripheral fault at the slave

If at least 1 bit is set in this list, the bit for PE is also set. (→Diagnosis - AS-i diagnosis (→ S. 181))

>

Diagnosis - List of double addressed slaves (LDAS) 41451

Offset Word no.

Bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

n 15(A) 14(A) 13(A) 12(A) 11(A) 10(A) 9(A) 8(A) 7(A) 6(A) 5(A) 4(A) 3(A) 2(A) 1(A) 0

n+1 31(A) 30(A) 29(A) 28(A) 27(A) 26(A) 25(A) 24(A) 23(A) 22(A) 21(A) 20(A) 19(A) 18(A) 17(A) 16(A)

n+2 15B 14B 13B 12B 11B 10B 9B 8B 7B 6B 5B 4B 3B 2B 1B n.a.

n+3 31B 30B 29B 28B 27B 26B 25B 24B 23B 22B 21B 20B 19B 18B 17B 16B

Possible values of slave fields:

0 ... no error 1.... Double address error detected

Page 184: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

184

If at least 1 bit is set in this list, the bit for DAE is also set. (→Diagnosis - AS-i diagnosis (→ S. 181)).

>

Slot 14 – Inputs from PLC 41625

Slot

Description Value range Size

[words]

14 Data from the device-internal PLC to the EtherNet/IP PLC

Empty module = module is deactivated 0

004 words = 4 words AC1421/22 PLC >> fieldbus PLC 4

008 words = 8 words AC1421/22 PLC >> fieldbus PLC 8

012 words = 12 words AC1421/22 PLC >> fieldbus PLC 12

016 words = 16 words AC1421/22 PLC >> fieldbus PLC 16

020 words = 20 words AC1421/22 PLC >> fieldbus PLC 20

024 words = 24 words AC1421/22 PLC >> fieldbus PLC 24

028 words = 28 words AC1421/22 PLC >> fieldbus PLC 28

032 words = 32 words AC1421/22 PLC >> fieldbus PLC 32

036 words = 36 words AC1421/22 PLC >> fieldbus PLC 36

040 words = 40 words AC1421/22 PLC >> fieldbus PLC 40

044 words = 44 words AC1421/22 PLC >> fieldbus PLC 44

048 words = 48 words AC1421/22 PLC >> fieldbus PLC 48

052 words = 52 words AC1421/22 PLC >> fieldbus PLC 52

056 words = 56 words AC1421/22 PLC >> fieldbus PLC 56

060 words = 60 words AC1421/22 PLC >> fieldbus PLC 60

076 words = 76 words AC1421/22 PLC >> fieldbus PLC 76

092 words = 92 words AC1421/22 PLC >> fieldbus PLC 92

108 words = 108 words AC1421/22 PLC >> fieldbus PLC 108

120 words = 120 words AC1421/22 PLC >> fieldbus PLC 120

Page 185: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

185

>

Slot 15 – Outputs to PLC 41618

Slot Description Value range Size

[words]

15 Data from the EtherNet/IP PLC to the device-internal PLC

Empty module = module is deactivated 0

004 words = 4 words fieldbus PLC >> AC1421/22 PLC 4

008 words = 8 words fieldbus PLC >> AC1421/22 PLC 8

012 words = 12 words fieldbus PLC >> AC1421/22 PLC 12

016 words = 16 words fieldbus PLC >> AC1421/22 PLC 16

020 words = 20 words fieldbus PLC >> AC1421/22 PLC 20

024 words = 24 words fieldbus PLC >> AC1421/22 PLC 24

028 words = 28 words fieldbus PLC >> AC1421/22 PLC 28

032 words = 32 words fieldbus PLC >> AC1421/22 PLC 32

036 words = 36 words fieldbus PLC >> AC1421/22 PLC 36

040 words = 40 words fieldbus PLC >> AC1421/22 PLC 40

044 words = 44 words fieldbus PLC >> AC1421/22 PLC 44

048 words = 48 words fieldbus PLC >> AC1421/22 PLC 48

052 words = 52 words fieldbus PLC >> AC1421/22 PLC 52

056 words = 56 words fieldbus PLC >> AC1421/22 PLC 56

060 words = 60 words fieldbus PLC >> AC1421/22 PLC 60

076 words = 76 words fieldbus PLC >> AC1421/22 PLC 76

092 words = 92 words fieldbus PLC >> AC1421/22 PLC 92

108 words = 108 words fieldbus PLC >> AC1421/22 PLC 108

120 words = 120 words fieldbus PLC >> AC1421/22 PLC 120

Page 186: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

186

>

8.7.5 Acyclic data

Content

Overview: acyclic data ..........................................................................................................................187 Overview: acyclic data sets (DSx) ........................................................................................................189 Overview: System commands ..............................................................................................................190 Overview: AS-i master commands .......................................................................................................191 Programmers' notes: call up acyclic services .......................................................................................192

41545

Page 187: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

187

>

Overview: acyclic data 41792

The attributes in object class 801, instance 1, are preset as follows:

Attribute [dec]

from byte no.

[dec]

to byte no.

[dec]

Content DS Access r = read w = write

Number of

words

0 -- -- reserved for system start-up -- -- --

1 0 51 Read system information DS1 r 26

30 0 239 System command request channel -- r/w 120

31 0 239 System command reply channel -- r 120

32 0 69 M1: digital slave inputs 1(A)…31(A) and 1B…31B

(1 byte per slave) + M1 master flags (status AS-i master and exec.-ctl. flags and host flags)

DS2 r 35

33 0 149 M1: analogue slave inputs 1(A)…15(B) DS3 r 75

34 0 159 M1: analogue slave inputs 16(A)…31(B) DS4 r 80

35 0 63 M1: digital slave outputs 1(A)…31(A) and 1B…31B

(1 byte per slave) DS5 r/w 32

36 0 119 M1: analogue slave outputs 1(A)…15(B) DS6 r/w 60

37 0 127 M1: analogue slave outputs 16(A)…31(B) DS7 r/w 64

38 0 63 M1: status flags analogue outputs 1(A)…31(A) and 1B…31B DS8 r 32

39 0 31 M1: slave lists LAS, LDS, LPF, LCE DS9 r 16

40 0 7 M1: slave list LPS DS10 r 4

41 0 127 M1: current configuration data CDI DS11 r 64

42 0 127 M1: projected configuration data PCD DS12 r 64

43 0 63 M1: input parameter image DS13 r 32

44 0 63 M1: output parameter image DS14 r/w 32

46 0 143 M1: slave error counter, configuration error counter, AS-i cycle

counter DS15 r 72

47 0 23 M1: LCEMS, LCEAS, LDAE DS17 r 12

48 0 740 M1: Error distribution frame errors DS20 r 370

62 0 239 M1: command request channel -- r/w 120

63 0 239 M1: command reply channel -- r 120

64 0 69 M2: digital slave inputs 1(A)…31(A) and 1B…31B

(1 byte per slave) + M2 master flags (status AS-i master and exec.-ctl. flags and host flags)

DS2 r 35

65 0 149 M2: analogue slave inputs 1(A)…15(B) DS3 r 75

66 0 159 M2: analogue slave inputs 16(A)…31(B) DS4 r 80

67 0 63 M2: digital slave outputs 1(A)…31(A) and 1B…31B

(1 byte per slave) DS5 r/w 32

68 0 119 M2: analogue slave outputs 1(A)…15(B) DS6 r/w 60

69 0 127 M2: analogue slave outputs 16(A)…31(B) DS7 r/w 64

70 0 63 M2: status flags analogue outputs 1(A)…31(A) and 1B…31B DS8 r 32

71 0 31 M2: slave lists LAS, LDS, LPF, LCE DS9 r 16

Page 188: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

188

Attribute [dec]

from byte no.

[dec]

to byte no.

[dec]

Content DS Access r = read w = write

Number of

words

72 0 7 M2: slave list LPS DS10 r 4

73 0 127 M2: current configuration data CDI DS11 r 64

74 0 127 M2: projected configuration data PCD DS12 r 64

75 0 63 M2: input parameter image DS13 r 32

76 0 63 M2: output parameter image DS14 r/w 32

78 0 143 M2: slave error counter, configuration error counter, AS-i cycle

counter DS15 r 72

79 0 23 M2: LCEMS, LCEAS, LDAE DS17 r 12

80 0 37 Read M2: Error distribution frame errors DS20 r 370

94 0 239 M2: command request channel -- r/w 120

95 0 239 M2: command reply channel -- r 120

Legend:

DS = M1 = M2 =

data set (→ Overview: acyclic data sets (DSx) (→ S. 189)) AS-i Master 1 AS-i Master 2

Page 189: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

189

>

Overview: acyclic data sets (DSx) 41791

Data record

Content Access r = read w = write

Words

DS1 System information r 26

DS2 Digital inputs of slaves 1(A)…31(A) and 1B…31B and master flags (Status AS-i master and exec.-ctl. flags and host flags)

r 36

DS3 Analogue inputs of slaves 1(A)…15(B) r 75

DS4 Analogue inputs of slaves 16(A)…31(B) r 80

DS5 Digitale outputs of slaves 1(A)…31(A) and 1B...31B r/w 32

DS6 Analogue outputs of slaves 1(A)…15(B) r/w 60

DS7 Analogue otputs of slaves 16(A)…31(B) r/w 64

DS8 Statusflags of analogue output data of slaves 1(A)…31(A) and 1B…31B r 32

DS9 Slave lists LAS, LDS, LPF, LCE r 16

DS10 Slave list LPS r 4

DS11 Actual Configuration data (CDI) r 64

DS12 Projected Configuration data (PCD) r 64

DS13 Image of input parameter r 32

DS14 Image of output parameter r/w 32

DS15 Slave error counter, configuration error counter, AS-i cycle counter r 72

DS16 n.a. – –

DS17 AS-i master: Error lists LCEMS, LCEAS, LDAE r 12

DS18 Fieldbus information (only available via CODESYS) r 19

DS19 n.a. – –

DS20 n.a. – –

Detailed information about the acyclic data sets and the command interface is given in the supplement to the device manual of the AS-i Gateway mit EtherNet/IP-Device Schnittstelle (→ Overview: User documentation for AC1421/22 (→ S. 7)).

Page 190: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

190

>

Overview: System commands 41794

Comm. no. [hex]

Comm. no. [dec]

Description

0101 257 Quick setup AS-i Master 1/2

0103 259 Change the user language

0104 260 Change the display settings

0105 261 Set output control

0106 262 Set the PLC operating mode

0109 265 Set the date / time

010A 266 Configure the NTP server settings

010B 267 Read date / time / NTP settings

010C 268 Reboot the system

010D 269 Read fieldbus information (can only be executed in CODESYS!)

010F 271 Read text of an OSC entry

0110 272 Display target visualisation

Detailed information about the acyclic data sets and the command interface is given in the supplement to the device manual of the AS-i Gateway mit EtherNet/IP-Device Schnittstelle (→ Overview: User documentation for AC1421/22 (→ S. 7)).

Page 191: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

191

>

Overview: AS-i master commands 41795

Comm. no. [hex]

Comm. no. [dec]

Description Note

0001 1 Write parameters to a connected AS-i slave

0003 3 Adopt and save currently connected AS-i slaves in the configuration

With this command the fieldbus connection is reset. The device must be rebooted!

ConfDataInput Slave → Projected Configuration Data and LDS → LPS

0004 4 Change the list of projected AS-i slaves (LPS)

0005 5 set the operating mode of the AS-i master

0006 6 readdress a connected AS-i slave

0007 7 set the auto addressing mode of the AS-i master

0009 9 change the extended ID code 1 in the connected AS-i slave

000A 10 change PCD

000D 13 AS-i master supply voltage, symmetry, earth fault

0015 21 read ID string of an AS-i slave with profile S-7.4 slave profile S-7.4

001A 26 read AS-i master info

001C 28 deactivation of the slave reset when changing to the protected mode

0021 33 read diagnostic string of an AS-i slave with profile S-7.4 slave profile S-7.4

0022 34 read parameter string of an AS-i slave with profile S-7.4 slave profile S-7.4

0023 35 write parameter string of an AS-i slave with profile S-7.4 slave profile S-7.4

0024 36 CTT2 standard read: acyclic standard read call of an AS-i slave with CTT2 profile

CTT2 slave profile *)

0025 37 CTT2 standard write: acyclic standard write call of an AS-i slave with CTT2 profile

CTT2 slave profile *)

0026 38 CTT2 vendor specific read: acyclic manufacturer-specific read call of an AS-i slave with CTT2 profile

CTT2 slave profile *)

0027 39 CTT2 vendor specific write: acyclic manufacturer-specific write call of an AS-i slave with CTT2 profile

CTT2 slave profile *)

0040 64 CTT2 device group read: acyclic manufacturer-specific read call of an AS-i slave with CTT2 profile

CTT2 slave profile *)

0041 65 CTT2 device group write: acyclic device group write call of an AS-i slave with CTT2 profile

CTT2 slave profile *)

0042 66 CTT2 vendor specific selective read from buffer: selective standard read call of an AS-i slave with CTT2 profile

CTT2 slave profile *)

0043 67 CTT2 vendor specific selective write from buffer: selective standard write call of an AS-i slave with CTT2 profile

CTT2 slave profile *)

0044 68 CTT2 vendor specific selective read: selective manufacturer-specific read call of an AS-i slave with CTT2 profile

CTT2 slave profile *)

0045 69 CTT2 vendor specific selective write: selective manufacturer-specific write call of an AS-i slave with CTT2 profile

CTT2 slave profile *)

0046 70 CTT2 device group selective read: selective device group read call of an AS-i slave with CTT2 profile

CTT2 slave profile *)

0047 71 CTT2 device group selective write: selective device group write call of an AS-i slave with CTT2 profile

CTT2 slave profile *)

0049 73 CTT2 vendor specific exchange: manufacturer-specific data exchange with an AS-i slave with CTT2 profile

CTT2 slave profile *)

Page 192: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

192

Comm. no. [hex]

Comm. no. [dec]

Description Note

004A 74 CTT2 device group exchange: device group data exchange with an AS-i salve with CTT2 profile

CTT2 slave profile *)

004B 75 CTT2 device group selective read from buffer: manufacturer-specific read / write call of an AS-i slave with CTT2 profile

CTT2 slave profile *)

004C 76 CTT2 device group selective write from buffer: device group read / write call of an AS-i slave with CTT2 profile

CTT2 slave profile *)

0050 80 set AS-i master settings

0051 81 Reset the error counters

Legend:

*) ... CTT2 profiles = S-7.5.5, S-7.A.5 or S-B.A.5 CTT → Combined transaction – Use of analogue channels in the gateway depending on the slave profile (→ S. 139)

Detailed information about the acyclic data sets and the command interface is given in the supplement to the device manual of the AS-i Gateway mit EtherNet/IP-Device Schnittstelle (→ Overview: User documentation for AC1421/22 (→ S. 7)).

>

Programmers' notes: call up acyclic services 41769

EtherNet/IP controllers use the Message (MSG) command to send data/commands asynchronously to

another network participant and receive its response.

For detailed information about the Message (MSG) command: → operating instructions of the

EtherNet/IP controller used!

Page 193: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

193

>

8.7.6 EtherNet/IP projection software: Programmers' notes

Content

Registration of the EDS file ..................................................................................................................193 Integrate the Device into the EtherNet/IP project .................................................................................194 Configuration mode ..............................................................................................................................195

41549 >

Registration of the EDS file 41776

ifm provides an EDS file to integrate the AC1421/22 in a EtherNet/IP projection software. The EDS file is stored on the device. In the EDS file, all parameters, process data, and their valid value ranges are defined.

To add the AC1421/22 to the device catalogue of RSLogix 5000:

► Download and unpack the ESD file (→ Download the device and I/O description (→ S. 88)).

► Start RSLogix 5000.

► Select [Tools] > [EDS Hardware Installation Tool].

> EDS Wizard appears.

► Register the downloaded EDS file of the AC1421/22 with the EDS Wizard.

> EDS Wizard installs the EDS file and adds the AC1421/22 to the device catalogue.

Page 194: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

194

>

Integrate the Device into the EtherNet/IP project 41492

Preparations

► Connect the device via the field bus interface (X6/X7) with the I/O scanner

► Activate the top-down configuration mode (→ Set the configuration mode (→ S. 91)).

► Register the EDS file (→ Registration of the EDS file (→ S. 193)).

1 Open / create EtherNet/IP project

► Start RSLogix 5000.

► Open an existing EtherNet/IP project. OR Create a new EtherNet/IP project with EtherNet/IP controller and IO scanner.

2 Add AC1421/22 to the project

► In the Controller Organizer: Right mouse click on IO scanners

> Context menu appears.

► In the context menu: Select [New Module].

> The window [Select Module Type] appears.

► Select the device and click on [Create].

> The [New Module] window appears.

► Enter name and IP address of the AC1421/22.

3 Configure module definition

► In the window [New Module]: Click on [Change ...]

> The [Module Definition] window appears.

► Select the value [Compatible Module] in the [Electronic Keying] list.

► In the [Name] column: Select [Exclusive Owner].

► Click on [OK] to adopt the entered values.

► Click on [OK] to add the device to the project.

> RSLogix 5000 adds the device as a sub-element of the IO scanner to the project.

Page 195: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

195

>

Configuration mode 41611

To properly set the AC1421/22 for permanent operation in the EtherNet/IP network, type and scope of the data to be transmitted as well as the parameters of the EtherNet/IP interface need to be defined. The following configuration modes are available:

Configuration mode: Top-Down (→ S. 196)

Configuration mode: Independent (→ S. 197)

Page 196: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

196

>

Configuration mode: Top-Down 41609

In the configuration mode "top-down", the parameter data is set in the EtherNet/IP projection software. The configuration created in this way is then transferred to the device (download).

Qualifications

► The device has been added to the EtherNet/IP project (→ Integrate the Device into the EtherNet/IP project (→ S. 194))

► Activate the top-down configuration mode (→ Set the configuration mode (→ S. 91)).

1 Open controller tags

► In the Controller Organizer: double-click on [Controller Tags]

> [Controller Tags] window appears.

► In the tree view: Click on [AC1421/22:C].

> Controller tags for the configuration of the device appear.

2 Set parameter data

► Set device parameters (→ Device-specific parameters (→ S. 146)).

► <Configure fieldbus slots (→ Parameters of the fieldbus slots (→ S. 155)).

NOTICE! For the transmission of cyclic process data between the device and the EtherNet/IP PLC, a limited number of data words is available for each direction of transmission:

Input data (= modules 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 10, 13, 14): 248 words

Output data (= modules 2, 4, 6, 8, 11, 12, 15): 248 words

If the EtherNet/IP modules have been parameterised in such a way that the cyclic input and output data comprise more than 248 words per direction of transmission, any data from the 249th word will not be transmitted and will therefore be lost.

> Risk of data loss.

► Parameterise the EtherNet/IP modules in a way to ensure that the input and output data do not exceed the maximum number of words to be transmitted.

► Save the project.

3 Transfer configuration to the device

► Set the communication path to the device (→ operating instructions RSLogix 5000).

► Transfer the project to the EtherNet/IP controller and start it.

> The EtherNet/IP controller transfers the configuration to the device.

> AC1421/22: the start screen shows the status of the EtherNet/IP connection:

EtherNet/IP active

4 Optional: import the description of the inputs and outputs into the project

► Download the I/O description file (→Download the device and I/O description (→ S. 88)).

► In RSLogix 5000: Select [Tools] > [Import] > [Tags and Logic Comments ...].

> The [Import] dialogue box appears.

► Select the downloaded I/O description file and click on [Import].

> RSLogix 5000 imports the I/O description into the [Controller Tags].

► In [Controller Organizer]: double-click on [Controller Tags]

> The detailed view of the controller tags appears.

> Input assembly [AC1421/22:I) and output assembly [AC1421/22:O] show descriptions of the inputs and outputs.

Page 197: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

197

>

Configuration mode: Independent 41610

In the configuration mode "Independent", the parameter data is set via the GUI of the AC1421/22 (→ Set the configuration mode (→ S. 91), → Set the EtherNet/IP module configuration (→ S. 94)). The assembly configuration defined in the projection software is not evaluated.

Prerequisites

► AC1421/22 has been added to the EtherNet/IP project (→ Integrate the Device into the EtherNet/IP project (→ S. 194))

► Activate the "independent" configuration mode (→ Set the configuration mode (→ S. 91)).

1 Set parameter data

► Set device parameters (→ Set the device-specific parameters (→ S. 92))

► Configure fieldbus slots (→ Set the EtherNet/IP module configuration (→ S. 94))

NOTICE! For the transmission of cyclic process data between the device and the EtherNet/IP PLC, a limited number of data words is available for each direction of transmission:

Input data (= modules 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 10, 13, 14): 248 words

Output data (= modules 2, 4, 6, 8, 11, 12, 15): 248 words

If the EtherNet/IP modules have been parameterised in such a way that the cyclic input and output data comprise more than 248 words per direction of transmission, any data from the 249th word will not be transmitted and will therefore be lost.

> Risk of data loss.

► Parameterise the EtherNet/IP modules in a way to ensure that the input and output data do not exceed the maximum number of words to be transmitted.

Set the communication path to the device (→ operating instructions RSLogix 2).

► Transfer the project to the EtherNet/IP controller and start it.

> AC1421/22: the start screen shows the status of the EtherNet/IP connection:

EtherNet/IP active

3 Optional: import the description of the inputs and outputs into the project

► Download the I/O description file (→Download the device and I/O description (→ S. 88)).

► In RSLogix 5000: Select [Tools] > [Import] > [Tags and Logic Comments ...].

> The [Import] dialogue box appears.

► Select the downloaded I/O description file and click on [Import].

> RSLogix 5000 imports the I/O description into the [Controller Tags].

► In [Controller Organizer]: double-click on [Controller Tags]

> The detailed view of the controller tags appears.

> Input assembly [AC1421/22:I) and output assembly [AC1421/22:O] show descriptions of the inputs and outputs.

Page 198: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

198

>

8.8 OSC messages

Content

OSC messages: System ......................................................................................................................198 OSC messages: AS-i 1 / AS-i 2 ............................................................................................................199

41730

This section contains information about the messages for events, warnings and faults of the AC1421/22. >

8.8.1 OSC messages: System 41734

Message Type Corrective measures

An internal device error was detected <Fehlernummer>

Error ► Note the message and contact the ifm service center

Permitted temperature limit value inside the device was exceeded (<xxx.x> °C)

Warning ► Check thermal conditions of the system environment

First operation after delivery Event not necessary

The output control was set to <Gateway,manuell,PLC>

Event not necessary

System power-up completed, <SW-Version> Event not necessary

A system reset was requested manually Event not necessary

The user-specific message history was deleted. Event not necessary

The device was reset to factory settings via <HMI, Feldbus>.

Event not necessary

PLC used for more than 10 hours. Event not necessary

The project <Name> was loaded. Event not necessary

The PLC was set to the operating mode <Projektierungsmodus, geschützter Betrieb>.

Event not necessary

The firmware was updated from <FW-Version> to version <FW-Version>.

Event not necessary

The settings of the fieldbus interface were modified

Event not necessary

The fieldbus connection was established Event not necessary

The fieldbus connection was aborted Event not necessary

The IP settings of the configuration interface were changed

Event not necessary

Page 199: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

199

>

8.8.2 OSC messages: AS-i 1 / AS-i 2 41735

Message Type Corrective measures

System errors: AS-i master <1,2> Error ► Reboot the device

If the error occurs again:

► Note the message and contact the ifm service center!

Earth fault: AS-i <1,2> Error ► Check for earth fault of AC1421/22

Incorrect profile: AS-i <1,2>, slave <1(A)..31(A), 1B..31B> with profile <S-x.x.x> expected, but <S-y.y.y> found.

Error ► Check profile of the AS-i slave

Config error: AS-i <1,2>, slave <1(A)..31(A), 1B..31B> with the profile <S-x.x.x> missing

Error ► Check connections of the AS-i slave

► Reconnect AS-i slave

Config error: AS-i <1,2>, slave <1(A)..31(A), 1B..31B> with the profile <S-x.x.x> is available but not projected

Error ► Carry out projection process ([Quick setup] > [Project all])

Protocol error: AS-i <1, 2>, slave <1(A)..31(A), 1B..31B> no data transmission

Error ► Improve the transmission quality on the AS-i line

Double address detected: AS-i <1, 2>, slave <1(A)..31(A), 1B..31B>

Error ► Remove an AS-i slave with a double address from the AS-i network

► Readdress the remaining AS-i slave

► Reconnect removed AS-i slave to the AS-i network

The automatic addressing is not activated for AS-i <1,2>.

Warning ► Activate automatic addressing ([AS-i1]/[AS-i2] > [Master setup])

A voltage drop of 19.0 V was detected on AS-i master <1,2>

Warning ► Check voltage supply of the device and replace if necessary

A voltage drop of 22.5 V was detected on AS-i master <1,2>

Warning ► Check voltage supply of the device and replace if necessary

Increased message error rate: AS-i <1, 2>, slave <1(A)..31(A), 1B..31B>

Warning ► Improve the transmission quality on the AS-i line

Peripheral fault: AS-i <1, 2>, slave <1(A)..31(A), 1B..31B>

Warning ► Check displayed AS-i slave

AS-i slave with address 0 cannot be automatically readdressed (wrong profile)

Warning ► Activate automatic addressing ([AS-i1]/[AS-i2] > [Master setup]

Manual output change: AS-i <1, 2>, slave <1(A)..31(A), 1B..31B>, value: <0..F, 0..32768>

Event not necessary

Manual parameter change: AS-i <1, 2>, slave <1(A)..31(A), 1B..31B>, value: <0..F, 0..32768>

Event not necessary

AS-i master <1,2> was switched to the <geschützten Betrieb,Projektierungsmodus>

Event not necessary

AS-i projection process was carried out. Event not necessary

AS-i slave with the address 0 was detected Event not necessary

Page 200: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

200

9 Index

A

Acyclic data ................................................................................. 141, 186

Additional functions................................................................................ 37

Address assignment in Ethernet networks .......................................... 122

Adopt the system time of the PC ........................................................... 75

Analogue input ....................................................................................... 53

Analogue output ..................................................................................... 54

Appendix .............................................................................................. 119

Approval tests / certifications ............................................................... 119

Arrow and function keys ........................................................................ 12

Arrow keys ............................................................................................. 15

AS-i 1 / AS-i 2 ........................................................................................ 48

AS-i slaves ..................................................................................................... 53

Diagnosis ....................................................................................................... 51

Master setup .................................................................................................. 49

AS-i master .......................................................................................... 125

AS-i slaves ........................................................................................... 129

B

Behaviour of the settings upon firmware update ................................. 107

Binary field ............................................................................................. 31

Button ..................................................................................................... 22

C

Carry out a projection adaptation .......................................................... 50

Change an AS-i slave address .............................................................. 57

Change an AS-i slave parameter output ............................................... 57

Change the analogue output values manually ...................................... 55

Change the basic settings of the device ............................................. 105

Change the digital output values manually ........................................... 55

Change the Extended ID1 of the AS-i slave .......................................... 58

Checkbox ............................................................................................... 22

Clone device configuration .................................................................... 76

CODESYS PLC ..................................................................................... 12

Combined transaction – Use of analogue channels in the gateway depending on the slave profile ............................................................ 139

Configuration data (CDI) of the slaves (slave profiles) ....................... 131

Configuration interface ........................................................................ 104

connection concepts ................................................................................... 123

Configuration mode ............................................................................. 195

Independent................................................................................................. 197

Top-Down .................................................................................................... 196

Configuration of the analogue channels in slots 9 ... 12 ..................... 174

Configure the IP parameters automatically .....................................84, 90

Configure the IP parameters manually ............................................83, 90

Confirmation message ........................................................................... 29

Connect and address AS-i slaves ....................................................... 111

Connect the device to the periphery .................................................... 104

Connection via Ethernet network ........................................................ 124

Control a single PLC application ........................................................... 62

Control instance of the AS-i outputs .................................................... 114

Control of the graphical user interface .................................................. 14

Control PLC applications ....................................................................... 63

Cyclic data .................................................................................. 141, 162

D

Derivation of parameter values for free slave assignment .................. 161

Description of the control elements ....................................................... 20

Description of the extended ID code 1 ................................................ 133

Description of the extended ID code 2 ................................................ 133

Description of the ID code (selection) ................................................. 132

Description of the IO code for digital slaves ........................................ 132

Details of the diagnosis area ............................................................... 180

Device-specific parameters ........................................................ 142, 146

Diagnosis ............................................................................................. 182

Diagnosis - AS-i diagnosis ................................................................... 181

Diagnosis - List of double addressed slaves (LDAS) .......................... 183

Diagnosis - List of missing slaves (LCMES) ....................................... 182

Diagnosis - List of non-projected slaves (LCAES) .............................. 182

Diagnosis - List of peripheral faults (LPF) ........................................... 183

Diagnosis - List of slaves with wrong slave profile (LCE) ................... 183

Diagnosis - Master flags ...................................................................... 181

Diagnosis - System diagnosis ............................................................. 180

Digital input ............................................................................................ 53

Digital output .......................................................................................... 54

Direct link ............................................................................................. 123

Disconnect from web interface .............................................................. 35

Display ................................................................................................... 12

Display and reset performance data ..................................................... 52

Display and reset the error counters ..................................................... 51

Display diagnostic data ....................................................................80, 96

Display diagnostic protocol .................................................................. 118

Display elements ...........................................................................12, 120

Display EtherNet/IP data ....................................................................... 87

Display information about PLC projects ................................................ 61

Display the error statistics of the AS-i slaves ........................................ 51

Display the input/output data of the AS-i slave ..................................... 53

Display the module configuration .......................................................... 88

Display the status of the CODESYS PLC ............................................. 61

Display the voltage supply analysis ....................................................... 52

Download the device and I/O description .............................................. 88

E

EDS-file ................................................................................................ 161

Enable/Disable the device-internal PLC ................................................ 68

Ethernet configuration interface ............................................................ 13

EtherNet/IP

Diagnosis ....................................................................................................... 96

Information ..................................................................................................... 86

Setup ............................................................................................................. 89

EtherNet/IP fieldbus interface ................................................................ 13

EtherNet/IP interface ........................................................................... 104

EtherNet/IP projection software

Programmers' notes .................................................................................... 193

Example ................................................................................................. 17

structure of the digital input data ................................................................. 168

Examples ............................................................................................. 161

Exchange AS-i slave............................................................................ 112

Explanation of Symbols ........................................................................... 6

Export device configuration ................................................................... 77

Extended ID code 2 for analogue slaves with profile 7.3.x ................. 133

Extended ID code 2 for analogue slaves with profile 7.4.x ................. 134

F

Fieldbus EtherNet/IP............................................................................ 140

Fieldbus objects ................................................................................... 140

Fieldbus parameters ............................................................................ 141

Fieldbus status ..................................................................................... 114

Firmware update from SD card ........................................................... 108

Page 201: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

201

Firmware update via the web interface ............................................... 109

Free slave addresses

colour code + symbols .................................................................................. 28

Function keys ......................................................................................... 15

G

General .................................................................................................. 32

General safety instructions ...................................................................... 8

H

Housing ................................................................................................ 120

I

ifm system solutions .............................................................................. 97

Import device configuration ................................................................... 78

Information concerning the device ........................................................ 11

Install multi app .................................................................................... 101

Install single/basic app ........................................................................ 100

Integrate the Device into the EtherNet/IP project ................................ 194

Intended use .......................................................................................... 10

Interfaces ................................................................................ 13, 81, 121

Configuration interface .................................................................................. 82

EtherNet/IP interface ..................................................................................... 85

L

Legal and copyright information .............................................................. 5

List ......................................................................................................... 23

Locate error sources ............................................................................ 115

M

Mapping of the digital input/output data .............................................. 168

Master flags ......................................................................................... 128

Meaning of the colour combinations ...................................................... 28

Meaning of the colour combinations (example

configuration error type 2) ............................................................................. 26

Menu ...................................................................................................... 36

Menu functions ...................................................................................... 37

Menu navigation .................................................................................... 16

Menu view .............................................................................................. 16

Message types ..................................................................................... 115

Modification history .................................................................................. 7

Module setting

AC13x7 AS-i 1 ............................................................................................. 179

AC13x7 AS-i 1+2 ......................................................................................... 180

AC1421 ........................................................................................................ 178

AC1422 ........................................................................................................ 179

N

Navigate on a page................................................................................ 19

Navigation aids ...................................................................................... 17

Notes on ifm system solutions ............................................................... 98

Notes on IP settings.........................................................................82, 89

Numerical field ....................................................................................... 30

O

Online diagnosis function .................................................................... 115

Online Support Center (OSC).............................................................. 116

Operating elements ............................................................................... 12

Operating instructions ............................................................................ 33

Operating mode of the AS-i master ..................................................... 114

Operating modes of the AS-i master ................................................... 126

Operation .......................................................................................14, 120

Option 1

Transmit fieldbus and web interface data via different networks ............... 124

Option 2

transfer fieldbus and web interface data over the same network .............. 124

Optional

adjust the IP parameters ............................................................................. 109

switch the language with a key combination ................................................ 70

OSC

Show message history ................................................................................ 117

View current error messages ...................................................................... 116

OSC messages .................................................................................... 198

AS-i 1 / AS-i 2 .............................................................................................. 199

System ......................................................................................................... 198

Overview ................................................................................................ 11

acyclic data .................................................................................................. 187

acyclic data sets (DSx) ................................................................................ 189

AS-i master commands ............................................................................... 191

EtherNet/IP modules ................................................................................... 163

System commands ...................................................................................... 190

User documentation for AC1421/22 ............................................................... 7

Overview of free slave addresses ......................................................... 27

Overview of slave states ........................................................................ 25

P

Page view .............................................................................................. 19

Parameter data .................................................................................... 140

Parameter input ..................................................................................... 54

Parameter setting via the configuration assembly object .................... 145

Parameters

Independent mode ...................................................................................... 142

Top-down mode .......................................................................................... 143

Parameters of the fieldbus slots .......................................................... 155

Permitted use ......................................................................................... 10

PLC

Diagnosis ....................................................................................................... 65

Information ..................................................................................................... 61

Settings .......................................................................................................... 62

Power supply connections ................................................................... 120

Preliminary note ....................................................................................... 5

Preparations ............................................................................... 108, 109

Profiles of AS-i slaves .......................................................................... 130

Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) ................................................ 121

Programmers' notes

call up acyclic services ................................................................................ 192

Prohibited use ........................................................................................ 10

Projection mode ................................................................................... 126

Protected mode ................................................................................... 126

Purpose of the document ........................................................................ 5

Q

Quick setup ............................................................................................ 38

Access the device via QR code .................................................................... 41

Address the AS-i slaves connected to AS-i Master 1 ................................... 46

Address the AS-i slaves connected to AS-i Master 2 ................................... 47

Configure the EtherNet/IP interface .............................................................. 41

Configure the operating mode of the AS-i masters ...................................... 40

Configure the output access ......................................................................... 41

Project AS-i networks .................................................................................... 39

Set the Configuration interface ..................................................................... 44

Set the configuration mode ........................................................................... 43

Page 202: Device Manual AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface · 3.1.1 Permitted use . 41798 . The device is designed for operation in a control cabinet. The device may only be used

AS-i Gateway with EtherNet/IP device interface

202

R

Reboot the device ....................................................................... 108, 110

Recommended browsers ....................................................................... 32

Registration of the EDS file ................................................................. 193

Remote access ...................................................................................... 32

Required accessories ............................................................................ 13

Required background knowledge ............................................................ 8

S

Safety instructions ................................................................................... 8

SD card slot ........................................................................................... 13

Set the behaviour of the display ............................................................ 71

Set the configuration mode.................................................................... 91

Set the device cycle ............................................................................... 69

Set the device-specific parameters ....................................................... 92

Set the EtherNet/IP module configuration ............................................. 94

Set the monitoring functions of the AS-i master .................................... 50

Set the operating mode of the AS-i master ........................................... 49

Set the output access ............................................................................ 67

Set the system time ............................................................................... 72

Set the system time manually................................................................ 73

Setup .................................................................................................... 104

Setup of EtherNet/IP ............................................................................ 111

Setup of the configuration interface ..................................................... 112

Show AS-i slave information.................................................................. 56

Show Ethernet information .................................................................... 84

Show information ................................................................................... 86

Show information about installed ifm apps ............................................ 99

Show memory used ............................................................................... 65

Show target visualisation ....................................................................... 64

Show version information ...................................................................... 66

Slave profiles for slaves with combined transaction ........................... 138

Slave selector ........................................................................................ 24

Slave status

colour code + symbols .................................................................................. 26

Slot 1 – Digital input data single or A slaves, AS-i master 1 ............... 164

Slot 10 – Analogue input data ............................................................. 171

Slot 11 – Analogue output data ........................................................... 172

Slot 12 – Analogue output data ........................................................... 173

Slot 13 – Diagnostic data ..................................................................... 178

Slot 14 – Inputs from PLC ................................................................... 184

Slot 15 – Outputs to PLC ..................................................................... 185

Slot 2 – Digital output data single or A slaves, AS-i master 1 ............. 164

Slot 3 – Digital input data single or A slaves, AS-i master 2 ............... 165

Slot 4 – Digital output data single or A slaves, AS-i master 2 ............. 165

Slot 5 – Digital input data B slaves, AS-i master 1 .............................. 166

Slot 6 – Digital output data B slaves, AS-i master 1 ........................... 166

Slot 7 – Digital input data B slaves, AS-i master 2 .............................. 167

Slot 8 – Digital output data B slaves, AS-i master 2 ........................... 167

Slot 9 – Analogue input data ............................................................... 170

Start screen ........................................................................................... 36

Status LEDs................................................................................................. 114

Start screen 'Basic settings' ................................................................. 105

Start the recovery mode ............................................................. 108, 109

Status LED ........................................................................................... 113

Basic device ................................................................................................ 113

Fieldbus EtherNet/IP ................................................................................... 113

Status LEDs ........................................................................................... 12

Status of the web interface .................................................................. 114

Store diagnostic protocol ....................................................................... 79

Structure of the slave profile ................................................................ 131

Switch operating modes ...................................................................... 127

Switch the menu language .................................................................... 70

Synchronise the system time with an NTP server................................. 74

System ................................................................................................... 59

Diagnosis ....................................................................................................... 80

Information ..................................................................................................... 66

Programmable Logic Controller (PLC).......................................................... 60

Setup ............................................................................................................. 67

System description .................................................................................. 9

System reset .......................................................................................... 79

T

Tab menu/Tab ....................................................................................... 21

Table

Fixed slave assignment for slots 9 ... 12 .................................................... 175

Master flags ................................................................................................. 169

variable slave assignment for slots 9 ... 12................................................. 177

Tampering with the unit ........................................................................... 8

Technical data ..................................................................................... 120

Troubleshooting ................................................................................... 113

Types of ifm system solutions ............................................................... 98

U

Uninstall ifm apps ................................................................................ 102

Update ifm apps ................................................................................... 102

Update the firmware ................................................................... 108, 110

Update the firmware of the device ....................................................... 107

Use navigation aids ............................................................................... 19

V

Valid combinations IO code / ID code / extended ID code 2............... 135

W

Web interface

Access ........................................................................................................... 33

Navigation ...................................................................................................... 33

Password protection ...................................................................................... 34

Web interface login ................................................................................ 34